Hyperion

Financial Management 9.3.1

for Interactive Users
m y
Volume I • Student Guide

d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
D52784GC10

n a e
Edition 1.0
February 2008

t e r U s
D53386

I n
c l e ®

r a
O
 Author Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

Mark Mitsock Disclaimer

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and

Technical Contributors other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your
and Reviewers own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in
any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may
Ron Reiley not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish,
license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the
Tom Lefebvre express authorization of Oracle.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you
Editor find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University,
Susan Moxley 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not
warranted to be error-free.

Graphic Designer Restricted Rights Notice

Carisa Cannan If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using
the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is
applicable:
Publisher
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Judy Gaitan The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or
disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle
license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.

Trademark Notice

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other

names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Table of Contents 1

Preface
Course Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Course Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Student Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Activity Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Module 1: Navigating Financial Management

Lesson 1: Introduction to Financial Management

Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Hyperion Product Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Financial Management Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
m y
Financial Consolidation, Reporting, and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
d e
Product Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

c a
Financial Management Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

A
Related Hyperion Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

e
Lesson 2: Navigating Financial Management
c l
r a
Financial Management Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

O ly
Workspace Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Navigating Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

l & On
Financial Management Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

a e
Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

n
t e r
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
s
Dimension Hierarchies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
U
I n
Dimensions and Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Financial Management Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

l e
Value Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

c
Accounts and Custom Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

r a
Logging On to Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Opening Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
O
 Table of Contents

Financial Management User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

View Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Advanced and Basic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Navigating the POV Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Managing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Custom Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Related Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Module 2: Entering and Calculating Data

Lesson 3: Entering Data Using Data Grids

Data Grids Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Accessing Data Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Changing the Grid Layout and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Selecting Members for Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
m y
Selecting Members in the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
d e
Selecting Members from Member Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

c
Selecting Members for Columns and Rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 a
e A
Saving Data Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

c l
Cell Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

r a
Saving Data and Parent Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Clearing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
O ly
Filling Multiple Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

l & On
Spreading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Calculating Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
a e
Adding Cell Text and Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
n
t e r U s
Adding Line-Item Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Retrieving Data from Financial Data Quality Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Lesson 4: Loading Data I n

c l e
Data Load Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

r a
Group Dimension Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

O Data Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

iv Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Table of Contents

Line-Item Detail Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Changing Column Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Loading Data into Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Merge Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Replace Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Replace by Security Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Accumulate Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Accumulate Within File Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Extracting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Exporting Data with Extended Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Copying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Removing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Lesson 5: Entering Data in Data Forms

Working with Data Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Accessing Data Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Viewing Form Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Setting the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Selecting Point of View Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
m y
d e
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Calculating Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

c a
Adding Cell Text and Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

A
Adding and Editing Line-Item Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Accessing Linked Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
e
l
Adding Members to Data Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
c
r a
Suppressing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Exporting to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

O ly
Importing from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Module 3: Managing Journals l & On

n a e
t e r
Lesson 6: Adjusting Data with Journals
U s
I n
Journals Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Adjustments with Audit Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-3

c l e
Journal Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Journals and the Value Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-5

r a
Multiple Journal Postings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

O Parent Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Financial Management for Interactive Users v

 Table of Contents

Opening and Closing Periods for Journal Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Accessing Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Journal Balance Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Creating Journal Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Editing Journal Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Deleting Journal Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Filtering Journal Template Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Setting the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Filtering Journal Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Creating Journals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Entering Journal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Creating Auto-Reversing Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Creating Journals by Using Recurring Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Scanning Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Lesson 7: Processing and Reporting Journals

Journal Review Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Initiating the Journal Review Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Viewing Adjusted Data in Data Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
m y
Viewing Adjustments in the Entity Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
d e
Creating Journal Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

c a
Setting Journal Report Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11

A
Selecting Columns and Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Previewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
e
c l
Saving Journal Reports Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Saving Journal Reports Locally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

r a
Running Journal Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

O ly
Module 4: Managing Intercompany Data
l & On
a e
Lesson 8: Eliminating Intercompany Balances
n
t e r U s
Intercompany Transactions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercompany Account Balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
8-3

I n
Elimination Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

c l e
Plug Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercompany Eliminations and the Value Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
8-6

r aIntercompany Partner Matching Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating Intercompany Matching Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
8-9
O
vi Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Table of Contents

Viewing ICP Report Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Printing ICP Reports and Overriding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Editing and Saving Intercompany Matching Reports Locally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Editing and Saving ICP Reports Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Sending E-mail Alerts from an ICP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Lesson 9: Managing Intercompany Transactions

Intercompany Transactions Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Business Process for the Intercompany Transactions Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Open Intercompany Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Creating Intercompany Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loading Intercompany Transaction Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Process IC Transactions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Creating Transactions from Process IC Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Sending E-mail Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Matching Intercompany Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Matching Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Posting Intercompany Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Generating Matching Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
m y
d e
Drill-Through Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Locking Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

c a
Closing Intercompany Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Monitoring Intercompany Entity Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

e A
Module 5: Consolidation and Managing Data
c l
Lesson 10: Consolidating Data r a
O ly
Financial Management Business Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

l & On
Consolidation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

n a e
Consolidation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Translating Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

e r s
Translating Data in Data Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
t U
Entering Exchange Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

I n
Consolidation and the Value Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

c l e
Value Dimension Consolidation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Checking Calculation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

r aConsolidation Percentages Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Running Consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
O Viewing Consolidation Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Financial Management for Interactive Users vii

 Table of Contents

Lesson 11: Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Process Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Submission Phases and Process Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Submission Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
Process States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Process Management Security Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Security Access for Process Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Viewing Process Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Process Control Panel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Viewing Status for Multiple Submission Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Viewing Status for All Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Managing Validation Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Process Unit Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
Viewing Validation Account Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-20
Calculating and Consolidating Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-22
Moving Process Units Through the Review Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-24
Submission Phases and Review Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-25
E-mail Alerts and Process Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-26
m y
d e
Selecting Review Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-28
Attaching Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-31

c a
Viewing Review History in Data Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-33

A
Viewing Process Level in Data Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-34
Managing Process Unit States in Data Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-35
e
l
Locking and Unlocking Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-37
c
Module 6: Reporting and Analyzing Data r a
O ly
& On
Lesson 12: Analyzing Data with Smart View
l
a e
Smart View Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

n
e r
Smart View Installation Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
s
Smart View Business Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
t U
Smart View Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

I n
Connecting to Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

l e
Viewing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

c
Specifying Ad Hoc Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

r a
Specifying Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Creating Free-form Worksheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
O Changing the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

viii Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Table of Contents

Changing Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

Drilling Down and Up Dimension Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Pivoting Dimensions to Columns or Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Displaying Cell Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Viewing Calculation, Translation, and Consolidation Status in Smart View . . . . . . . 12-27
Presenting Financial Management Data in Word and PowerPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Applying Dynamic Data Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
Changing the POV in Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31

Lesson 13: Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Opening Data Forms in Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Selecting a Data Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Selecting Multiple Data Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Navigating Data Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Selecting Members in Smart View Data Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Adjusting Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Working with Formulas and Cell References in Data Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Creating Formulas in Data Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Inserting Cell References in Formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
m y
e
Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
d
Lesson 14: Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View
c a
A
Smart View Functions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
e
c l
Methods for Creating Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Smart View Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

r a
Creating Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

O ly
Editing and Refreshing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Common Function Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
& On
Setting the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11
l
n a e
Importing Reports and Functions into Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Importing Reports and Functions Through Smart Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

e r s
Converting Workbooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
t U
I n
Module 7: Introduction to Financial Reporting

c l e
Lesson 15: Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

r a
Financial Reporting in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users ix
 Table of Contents

Financial Reporting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

Financial Reporting Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Accessing Financial Reports in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Opening and Previewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Searching for Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Previewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Printing Reports and Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Changing the User Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Previewing the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Limiting User Point of View Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
Changing Page Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
Integrating Reports into Microsoft Office Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Exporting Reports to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Exporting Reports to Word and PowerPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24
Importing Reports to Microsoft Office Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

Lesson 16: Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Accessing Financial Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Logging On to Financial Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
m y
d e
Financial Reporting Studio Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Displaying Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

c a
Opening Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8

A
Report Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
User Point of View Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
e
l
Report Preview and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-11
c
Module 8: Creating Reports r a
O ly
Lesson 17: Creating Basic Reports
l & On
a e
Report Creation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
n
t e r s
Creating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Creating Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
U
I n
Selecting Database Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Creating Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6

l e
Setting Up Dimension Layouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8

c
Changing Dimension Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10

r a
Selecting Members for Rows and Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13
O
x Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Table of Contents

Selecting Member Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15

Finding Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Previewing Selected Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
Placing Members in Separate Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19
Prompting for Member Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Selecting Members from Other Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22
Setting the Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-24
Defining the Members for the Grid POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-26
Rules to Determine the POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27
Limiting Grid POV Selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28
Selecting POV Members for Multiple Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-30
Selecting the Current Point of View Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-31
Adding Rows or Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-32
Saving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-34

Lesson 18: Formatting Cells and Grids

Formatting Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Inheriting Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6

m y
Aligning Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4

d e
Formatting Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Row and Column Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Specifying Row and Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
c a
Formatting Row Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-11
A
Freezing Row and Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
e
c l
Suppressing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Setting Up Basic Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16

r a
Conditional Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17

O ly
Setting Up Conditional Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Applying Conditional Formatting in Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
& On
Setting Up Conditional Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
l
n a e
Formatting Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Setting Up Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25

t e r
Lesson 19: Creating Report Objects
U s
I n
Report Objects Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

c l e
Creating Text Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-3
19-4

r a
Saving Report Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users xi
 Table of Contents

Inserting Saved Report Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

Linked Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Creating Headers and Footers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-11

Lesson 20: Adding Text Functions

Text Functions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Inserting Text Functions in Text Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Inserting Text Functions in Headings and Text Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Creating Dynamic Values with the Current Keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Common Text Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
CalcStatus and ProcessManagementStatus Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
CellText and GetCell Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14
Row and Column ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-16
Date Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17
HFMCurrency Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-19
MemberDescription and MemberName Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21
Report Information Text Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23

Lesson 21: Adding Auto Calculations and Mathematical Functions

m y
d e
Working with Auto Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

c a
Adding Auto Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

A
Including Auto Calculations in Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
e
c l
Reference Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Property Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-11

r a
Mathematical Operators in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13

O ly
Mathematical Operands in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14
Natural Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14

l & On
Creating Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15

n a e
Defining Formula Rows, Columns, and Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17
Calculating Formulas at the Cell Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19

e r s
Common Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-20
t U
Sum Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22

I n
Variance and VariancePercent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23

c l e
Lesson 22: Printing Multiple Reports with Books

r a
Books Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

O
xii Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Table of Contents

Previewing and Printing Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4

Changing the Book POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Creating Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
Setting Member Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
Copying Member Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-11
Hiding Member Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Changing the Appearance of Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
Collating the Table of Contents by Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Collating the Table of Contents by Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-17

Appendix A: Creating and Managing Task Lists

Task Lists Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Creating Task Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Adding Items to Task Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Organizing Task List Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Folder Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Nesting Task Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Adding Related Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

m y
Adding Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
e
Managing Task Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
d
Appendix B: Automating Tasks
c a
A
Task Automation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
e
c l
Tasks Available for Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Uses for Task Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

r a
Taskflow Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

O ly
Components of Taskflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

l & On
Creating Taskflows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Stage Definition—General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

a e
Stage Definition—Processing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
n
t e r s
Stage Definition—Starting Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Adding Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
U
I n
Testing Taskflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Taskflow Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

l e
Viewing Taskflow Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

c
Viewing Task Audit Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

r a
Viewing Data Audit Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users xiii
 Table of Contents

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
xiv Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Preface 0

Welcome to Hyperion Financial Management 9.3.1 for Interactive Users!

Before you begin, please take a moment to review this section. The
preface presents an overview of the following information:
• Structure of the course
• Course materials used in the class
• Conventions used in the book
• Relevant follow-up courses that you might want to attend in the future

Course Structure
m y
d e
Hyperion Financial Management 9.3.1 for Interactive Users is a 3-day,
instructor-led training course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and

c a
hands-on exercises. In this course, the instructor presents a topic
conceptually by explaining its purpose, demonstrating how it works, and
A
then guiding the students through the exercises. Demonstrations and
e
lectures.
c l
hands-on exercises reinforce the concepts and skills introduced during

r a
Course Materials
O ly
l & On
You use two books in class—the student guide and the activity guide. The
instructor may also give you handouts.

n a e
Student Guide

t e r U s
The student guide is designed to be used by students and the instructor

I n
during lecture time. It has 7 modules:

c l e
• Module 1 is navigating in Financial Management.
• Module 2 is entering and calculating data

r a • Module 3 is managing journals

O
 Preface

• Module 4 is managing intercompany data

• Module 5 is consolidating and managing data
• Module 6 is analyzing data.
• Module 7 is an introduction to reporting
• Module 8 is creating reports
Each module contains lessons. Each lesson begins with a list of objectives followed by
the presentation of slides and accompanying text. The lesson ends with a summary of
the topics covered in the lesson.
A glossary provides definitions of terms used during the course.

Activity Guide
The activity guide contains step by step exercises.

Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this course book:
• Text to be typed, options to be selected, names of files and modules, and menu
selections are displayed in bold type. Examples:
m y
- Select Clear Profile.
d e
- Click YES to clear the profile.
c a
A
• When available, figures are used to identify an object or task. Example:
e
Click Edit.
c l
r a
O ly
• Keyboard shortcuts are displayed as follows: Ctrl+Enter

& On
• Alerts are used to direct your attention to different types of information.
l
NOTE

n a e
t e
current topic. r U s
A note provides related information, common mistakes, or cautions about the

I n
c l e
TIP
A tip provides information that helps you work more efficiently.

r a
O
xvi Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Preface

NOTE
Course names and learner paths may change.
Visit www.hyperion.com/services/education_services for the latest information.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users xvii
 Preface

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
xviii Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 1

Navigating Financial Management 0

Overview
This module introduces you to the features of Hyperion Financial
Management.
Lessons in this module include:
• Introduction to Financial Management
• Navigating Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 1

Introduction to Financial Management 1

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management system
• Describe Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition Plus
• Describe the features of Financial Management
• Describe the products bundled with Financial Management
• Describe related products

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management

System

Integrates transaction, intelligence, and financial systems

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management System
c
r a
Oracle Business Intelligence (BI) is a portfolio of technology and applications that
provides the industry's first integrated, end-to-end Enterprise Performance Management
O ly
(EPM) system, including category-leading financial performance management

& On
applications, operational BI applications, BI foundation and tools, and data warehousing.

l
a e
It is pervasive, comprehensive, and hot-pluggable:

n
t e r U s
• Pervasive—Delivers intuitive, role-based intelligence for everyone in an organization
from front line employees to senior management to enable better decisions, actions,

I n
and business processes. There is a common workspace and a range of real-time
and event-based capabilities. It also covers all styles of reporting and analysis needs.

c l e
• Comprehensive—Integrates information from your financial performance

r a
management, operational intelligence, and transactional applications. It has a single
integrated platform architecture and a unified enterprise information model.

O
1-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Hot-Pluggable—Uses your existing transaction systems, databases, and middleware

applications. Oracle BI products are hot-pluggable with Oracle and non-Oracle
environments.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 1-3
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise

Edition Plus

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition Plus
c
r a
Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition Plus (Oracle BI EE Plus) is a
comprehensive suite of enterprise BI products that delivers a full range of analysis and
O ly
reporting capabilities. Featuring a unified, highly scalable, modern architecture,

l & On
Oracle BI EE Plus provides intelligence and analytics from data spanning enterprise
sources and applications—empowering the largest communities with complete and
relevant insight.
n a e
e r s
Oracle BI EE Plus bundles key Oracle Hyperion reporting products for integrated
t U
reporting with Oracle’s Hyperion financial applications.

I n
c l e
r a
O
1-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Hyperion Product Components

Financ ial Performance Management Applications
Financial Management
Planning
Strategic Finance
Performance Scorecard
Essbase
Essbase
Administration Services
Provider Services
Integration Services
Reporting and Analysis
Workspace Interactive Reporting
Web Analysis

Financial Reporting
SQR Production Reporting
Data Management
Dat a Relationship Management
Data Integration Management

Financial Data Q uality Management

m y
e
Foundation Services
Shared Services

Smart View

a d
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

A c
Hyperion Product Components
c l e
r a
Oracle BI Suite Enterprise Edition Plus is a combination of Oracle BI Suite Enterprise
Edition and Hyperion product components.
O ly
Primary components of Hyperion products:

l & On
• Financial Performance Management Applications—A modular suite of integrated
a e
applications that support the entire financial management cycle of goal-setting,
n
t e r U s
modeling, planning, monitoring, analysis, and reporting
• Essbase—The business analysis server technology that provides an environment

I n
for rapidly developing custom analytic and enterprise performance management

c l e
applications
• Reporting and Analysis—A suite of tools that enable you to create analytical,

r a
financial, and production reports as well as dashboards

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 1-5
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

• Data Management—A packaged solution that enables organizations to integrate

disparate sources of data across an enterprise, map data, and manage change
• Foundation Services—A single, standardized infrastructure that facilitates the
deployment of Hyperion product solutions and simplifies ongoing maintenance
• Workspace—The Web client for Reporting and Analysis, Planning, and Financial
Management. It enables you to access and interact with Hyperion-authored content
as well as third-party documents, such as Microsoft Word and Excel files

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Financial Management Solution

ƒ Reduce consolidation and reporting cycles by days

or weeks.
ƒ Conduct in-depth analysis of key performance and operational metrics.
ƒ Deliver accurate and timely reports to both internal management and
external regulatory bodies.
ƒ Discover sources of profitability and cash flow at the company, product,
brand, and customer levels.
ƒ Consolidate data with multiple consolidation paths.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Financial Management Solution
c l
r a
Financial Management delivers global data collection, financial consolidation, reporting,
and analysis in one highly scalable solution.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 1-7
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Financial Consolidation, Reporting, and Analysis
c
r a
Financial Management enables highly efficient collection and consolidation of data from
diverse sources. It includes these features:
O ly
• Process management for tight control of the review and approval process
• Data validation
l & On
n a e
• Currency translation to support multiple local currencies

t e r U s
• Automatic eliminations for intercompany transactions

I n
Financial Management is designed for large-scale, centralized Web deployment. You

c l e
can use Financial Management to consolidate data from diverse general ledger systems
and locations around the globe.

r a
O
1-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Product Components

ƒ Financial Reporting
ƒ Smart View for Office
ƒ Shared Services

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Product Components
c l
a
Financial Management comes bundled with three products that extend its capabilities:
r
O ly
• Financial Reporting is a reporting and charting tool for Web or print distribution of
financial reports.

l & On
• Smart View for Office is a spreadsheet add-in based on Excel for reporting and
analysis.
n a e
e r s
• Shared Services enables user provisioning and sharing of metadata and data among
t U
Financial Management applications or between Financial Management and other
products.
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 1-9
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Financial Management Architecture

Client Windows client Browser client

Microsoft Excel

Application

Architect Financial Management Web server

Dimension Server server

Database

m y
Architect
RDBMS
Financial Management
RDBMS
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Financial Management Architecture
c l
r a
Financial Management uses a multitier architecture that includes a client tier, an
application tier, and a database tier.
O ly
The client tier contains the user interface. It communicates with the application tier. The

l & On
primary function of the client tier is to display, enter, and maintain data and to maintain
metadata.

n a e
t e r U s
The application tier contains the application, the report, and Web servers. The Web
server enables you to access the Web-based portions of Financial Management. The

I n
application server contains the financial intelligence and connections to the relational
database and OLAP engine. It also contains Hyperion System 9 BPM Architect for

l e
managing metadata.

c
r a
The data tier contains the relational databases for Financial Management metadata and
source data.

O
1-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Related Hyperion Products

ƒ Essbase
ƒ Web Analysis
ƒ Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Related Hyperion Products
c l
a
Oracle provides complementary products that integrate with Financial Management.
r
O ly
Essbase is a multidimensional database that extends the analytical capabilities of
Financial Management by providing more detail, more dimensions, and sophisticated
allocation routines.
l & On
a e
Web Analysis is an intuitive, Web-based, interactive data analysis tool that you can use
n
t e r U s
to retrieve and analyze Financial Management data.
Financial Data Quality Management is a packaged solution for finance users. It helps

I n
simplify the collection, mapping, verification, and loading of financial data from external

c l e
systems into Financial Management.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 1-11
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 1 Introduction to Financial Management

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management system

• Describe Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition Plus
• Describe the features of Financial Management
• Describe the products bundled with Financial Management
• Describe the product architecture of Financial Management
• Describe related products

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 2

Navigating Financial Management 2

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe Financial Management user interface components
• Describe the business process (tasks) in a typical monthly reporting
financial cycle
• Describe metadata and dimensions
• Log on to Workspace
• Access Financial Management through Workspace
m y
• Describe the user interface for Financial Management
d e
a
• Describe the difference between Basic and Advanced user modes
c
A
• Select dimension members using the Point of View (POV) Selector

e
l
• Manage documents in Financial Management

c
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Financial Management Components
c l
environment. r a
Hyperion integrates application creation and management in a centralized administration

O ly
• Single sign-on—Users log on once to Workspace to access BPM Architect, Financial

l & On
Management, and the reporting tools.

a e
• Single console for application management and creation—Users create, manage,
n
t e r U s
and deploy applications from Architect. These applications are opened in Financial
Management for data retrieval and data output.

I n
• Centralized repository of key dimensional elements.

l e
• Centralized console for controlling data flow between applications.

c
r a
O
2-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Workspace Overview

Menu / Toolbar

Navigate menu to access

Architect and applications

View pane

Content Pane
m y
Open application tabs
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Workspace Overview
c l
r a
Workspace provides a single BPM interface. It provides users these access and
interacting capabilities with Hyperion applications:
• Planning application tasks O ly
l & On
• Financial Management application tasks

n a e
• High-performance, multidimensional modeling, analysis, and reporting with Essbase

t e r s
• Financial reporting for scheduled or on-demand, highly formatted, financial and
U
Planning
I n
operational reporting from most data sources, including Financial Management and

l e
• Interactive reporting for ad hoc relational queries, self-service reporting, and
c
r a
dashboards against ODBC data sources
• Production reporting for high volume, enterprise-wide reporting
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-3
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

• Web Analysis for interactive, ad hoc analysis, presentation, and reporting of

multidimensional data
In addition, Workspace provides access and interaction with other published content,
such as Word or Excel documents.
Workspace includes the following elements:

Element Description
Adjuster Adjusts the size of the view pane and content area
Buttons Project View, Browser View and Tips
Content pane Displays active-module items, tasks, or files
Menu bar Provides commands that organize tasks and modules
Navigate menu Provides access to Workspace modules
Open Application tab Displays information specific to the current module
Standard toolbar Provides shortcuts for performing tasks
View pane Provides buttons that enable jumps between panels

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Navigating Workspace

m y
Financial Management applications

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Navigating Workspace
c l
a
The Navigate menu enables you to navigate to the modules available within Workspace.
r
Option
O ly
Description
Explore
& On
List and navigate through a repository of reports

l
Applications
a e
Access Financial Management and Planning applications

n
Administer
Schedule
t e rManage users, groups, roles, and authentication methods

U s
Manage jobs and schedule events for automated processing
Impact Manager
I n Update Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting™
documents when database structures, database connections, or

c l e links to external data sources change

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-5
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Financial Management Overview
c l
r a
Financial Management is a powerful application that enables you to manage enterprise
financial information quickly and cost effectively. You follow a typical task flow for a
monthly financial cycle.
O ly
Task Description
l & On
Load and add data
n a e
Add data to your application by loading it from a file and by using data

Calculate data
forms

t e r U s
Run calculation rules to populate calculated accounts
Adjust data
I n
Adjust the data by using journals that provide an audit trail of your

c l e
Translate and
adjustments
Translate and consolidate the data

r a
consolidate data
Approve data Submit the data for review and approval
O
2-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Task Description
Lock data Lock the data to prevent further modifications
Run and publish Run reports against the approved data
financial reports

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-7
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Metadata
c l
r a
Metadata is defined as the structural elements of an application that describe and hold
data. Examples of metadata are dimension names, member names, properties,
exchange rates, and security.
O ly
l & On
In the illustration in the slide, the circled dimension member labels are the metadata. The

n
Cola in Manhattan in January.a e
metadata describes the data value. The value 3689.00 is the value for Actual -> Sales for

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Dimensions

Account Entity Period

Incom e Before
Geographi cal Quarter1
Taxes

Un ited S tates January

Gross Margin

Cal ifornia February

Total Revenues

Co nnecti cu t M arch

Sales
Massachusetts

Sales I nterco

Total Costs

Salari es

In terest Charges

m y
Admi n E xp ense

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Dimensions
c l
r a
You create metadata for applications by defining dimensions. Dimensions describe your
organization’s data. Examples of dimensions are Account, Entity, and Period.
O ly
The elements that comprise a dimension are called members. For example,

l & On
GrossMargin and TotalRevenues are members of the Account dimension.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-9
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Dimension Hierarchies

Parents Child of Gross Margin

Inco me Before Taxes

Gross Margin 500 Descendants of

Gross Margin

To tal Revenues 900

Sales
700

200
Oth er Revenues

Total Costs 400

Salaries
400
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Dimension Hierarchies
c l
r a
Members of a dimension are arranged in hierarchies. Upper-level members are called
parent members, and a member immediately below a parent member is referred to as its

O ly
child. All members below a parent are referred to as descendants. The bottom-level

& On
members of the hierarchy are called base-level members.

l
n a e
The illustration in the slide shows a part of the dimension hierarchy of the Account
dimension. In this hierarchy, the Total Revenues member is a child of Gross Margin.

t e r U s
Sales, Other Revenues, Salaries, Total Revenues, and Total Costs are descendants of
Gross Margin. Sales, Other Revenues, and Salaries are base-level members.

I n
c l e
r a
O
2-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Dimensions and Data

Inco me Before Taxes Data aggregates

to the parents.

Gross Margin 500

To tal Revenues 900

Sales
700
Data is input to
base-level members.
200
Oth er Revenues

Total Costs 400

Salaries
400
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Dimensions and Data
c l
r a
Data is typically entered into base-level members of dimensions, not into parent
members. Values for parent-level members are aggregated from the children of the

O ly
parent-level members. In some cases, data for base-level members is calculated. For

l & On
example, the Salaries account member might be a base-level member whose value is
calculated based on head count and salary rate.

n a e
In the illustration in the slide, the data values from the base-level members are rolled up

t e r U s
to the parent-level members (Total Revenues and Total Costs). Data values from Total
Revenues and Total Costs are then rolled up to their parent (Gross Margin).

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-11
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Financial Management Dimensions
c l
r a
Financial Management supplies eight system-defined dimensions and four custom
dimensions. You customize the members of each dimension to meet the needs of your
organization.
O ly
Dimension Description
l & On
Scenario
a e
Set of related data, such as Budget, Actual, or Forecast. For example, the
n
r s
Budget scenario can contain data that reflects the targeted business

e
operations. The Actual scenario can contain data from a general ledger,

t U
reflecting past and current business operations. The Forecast scenario

I n
typically contains data that corresponds to predictions for upcoming periods.
In Financial Management, multiple scenarios can be defined for an

Year
c l e application.
Fiscal or calendar year for the data. An application can contain data for more

r a than one year.

O Period Time periods, such as quarters and months.

2-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Dimension Description
View Various modes of calendar intelligence, such as periodic, year-to-date, and
quarter-to-date frequencies. If you set the view to Periodic, the values for
each month are displayed. If you set the view to year-to-date or quarter-to-
date, the cumulative values for the year or quarter are displayed.
Entity Management and legal reporting structures in your organization, such as
regions and divisions. Entities can be categorized as base entities (bottom
of the organization structure; data is loaded to base entities) or parent
entities (contain one or more entities as children).
Value Types of values stored in an application. For example, the Entity Currency
member stores the value for an entity in the local currency of the entity. The
Parent Currency member stores the value for an entity translated to the
currency of the parent entity.
Account Hierarchy of natural accounts. Natural accounts store financial data for
entities and scenarios in an application. Each account has a type, such as
Revenue or Expense, that defines its accounting behavior.
Intercompany Intercompany account balances. Financial Management can track and
Partner eliminate intercompany transaction details across entities and accounts.
Custom Dimensions associated with accounts. These dimensions enable you to
specify additional details, such as products, markets, channels, or balance
sheet movement. For example, a custom dimension for products associated
m y
product.
d e
with Sales and COGS accounts enables you to track sales and cost detail by

c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-13
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Value Dimension

Contribution Total stores the value that aggregates to the parent.

These members store the intermediary

values used to derive Contribution T otal.

Entity Currency stores the original input or loaded value.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Value Dimension
c l
r a
The Value dimension is a system-defined dimension that provides an audit trail of the
transformations applied to Financial Management data.

O ly
You load data for each entity to the Entity Currency member of the Value dimension for
& On
the entity. During the process of journal entry, currency translation, and consolidation, the
l
n a e
values that are input to the Entity Currency member typically go through transformations
before being aggregated to the parent. The Value dimension members store the data for

t e r U s
the intermediary steps in the transformation. For example, the Parent Currency member
stores the value for an entity translated to the currency of its parent entity.

I n
You can display Value dimension members on data grids and reports. The display

l e
provides an audit trail that enables you to determine how the value that each entity

c
contributed to its parent is derived.

r a
O
2-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Accounts and Custom Dimensions

The Sales account uses the Custom1 dimension to capture sales detail
by product. Custom1 members are not valid for the Cash account.

The Cash account uses the Custom4 dimension to capture cash flow
detail. Custom4 members are not valid for the Sales Account.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Accounts and Custom Dimensions
c l
detail for accounts. r a
Custom dimensions work in conjunction with the Account dimension, providing additional

O ly
Financial Management applications require four custom dimensions. Your administrator

l & On
can restrict an account by assigning it specific custom dimension members. Limiting the

size.
n a e
assignment of custom members prevents errors in data entry and reduces the database

t e r U s
For example, for a custom dimension that stores product detail, you can restrict the Cash

I n
On Hand account so that data entry or data load into the custom dimension members for
products is not allowed. (Cash on hand is not tracked by product.)

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-15
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Logging On to Workspace

Your Network ID
and password

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Logging On to Workspace
c l
password. r a
You start Financial Management by logging on to Workspace with a user name and

O ly
System 9 uses user names and passwords from the external authentication provider,

l & On
such as Active Directory or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). On the

n a e
Workspace logon page, you enter the user name and password that you use to access
your network. When you select a Financial Management application, Financial

e r s
Management verifies that your user name and password are valid for the application.
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Opening Applications

Financial Management applications are in the Consolidation group.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Opening Applications
c l
r a
In Financial Management, all data is processed within applications. An application is a
related set of dimensions and dimension members that meet a specific set of analytical or
O ly
reporting requirements; for example, an application named Testing for development and

& On
an application named Production to roll out to end users.

l
n a e
You access Financial Management applications from server clusters. Server clusters
improve performance by sharing the workload among a group of servers.

t e r U s
You can make the application that is currently open the default application (File >

n
Preferences). When you log on, the default application is opened automatically.
I
l e
To open Financial Management applications:
c
a
• Select Navigate > Applications > Consolidation, and select an application.
r
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-17
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Financial Management User Interface

Choose a command from the menu or click a toolbar button.

Maximize
content pane

View pane
Open application
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Financial Management User Interface
c l
r a
After you access Financial Management from the Navigate menu, the application is
displayed in a window with at tab at the bottom left. Financial Management provides
O ly
several tools for selecting tasks and documents:
• Financial Management menus
l & On
• Financial Management toolbar
n a e
• View pane
t e r U s
and favorites. I n
The toolbar buttons open dialog boxes that you can use to manage documents, task lists,

c l e
r a
O
2-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Button Purpose Description

New Document • Create Workspace document
• Collect reports in a book
• Batch reports for scheduling
Open Document Open Workspace documents

Home Workspace startup page

Explore Display Workspace folders in the view pane

Manage Documents Manage the following types of documents:

• TaskLists
• Data grids
• Data forms
• System reports
•
•
•
Links
Related content
Custom documents
m y
Manage TaskLists
d
Use this button to perform the following tasks: e
•
•
Add items to a TaskList
Remove items from a TaskList c a
• Reorder items on a TaskList

e A
•
l
Select a TaskList as your default TaskList

c
Manage Favorites
a
Use this button to perform the following tasks:

r
• View items stored as favorites

O ly
• Remove items stored as favorites
Logoff

l & On
Log off the application

Help
n a e Access help for the currently selected task or document

t e r U s
I n
Maximize Content
Pane (on far right of
navigation path)
Maximize or restore the content pane

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-19
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

View Pane
Project View button
Browser View button
Tips button

Project View Browser View Tips

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
View Pane
c l
r a
The view pane is displayed on the left side of the Financial Management Web page. The
view can be a browser view or a project view, depending on the toolbar button selected at
the top of the pane.
O ly
& On
• Browser View lists all accessible documents and tasks in the application. It is a split
l
n a e
pane. The bottom pane reflects the contents of the item selected in the top pane. You
can double-click an item in the bottom pane to view it in the content area on the right.

e r s
• Project View lists the available task lists. A task list is a predefined list of related tasks
t U
I n
or documents that you access frequently. You can expand a task list to show its
content. When you select a task list item, it is displayed in the content area on the
right.

c l e
r a
O
2-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Advanced and Basic Modes

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Advanced and Basic Modes
c l
r a
Depending on the tasks that users perform in Financial Management, you can set up
users with Advanced or Basic security roles. Users with the Advanced security role can
O ly
work in either Advanced mode or Basic mode. Users without the Advanced security role
can work only in Basic mode.

l & On
n a e
Advanced mode provides access to both Browser View and Project View. Browser View
provides access to all tasks and documents in Financial Management for which the user
has security privileges.

t e r U s
I n
When users work in Basic mode, the view pane displays predefined task lists. Users
select tasks and documents from the Project View pane to the right of the task list.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-21
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Navigating the POV Bar

Scroll to view more dimensions. Click a dimension to select a member.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Navigating the POV Bar
c l
r a
The members selected for the dimensions assigned to the point of view (POV) determine
the context for the data in the rows and columns of data grids and data forms. For
O ly
example, if the Scenario dimension is set to Budget in the POV of a data grid, then all

l & On
rows and columns on the data grid display data for the Budget scenario. The POV is
always set to a single member for each POV dimension.

n a e
To navigate the POV bar:

t e r U s
I n
• In the POV bar, click a dimension to display the Member Selector.
• If a POV dimension is not visible, click the double arrows at the left and right ends of

l e
the POV bar to scroll until the dimension is displayed.
c
r a
O
2-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Selecting Members

Member list Top parent

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Selecting Members
c l
r a
The Member Selector displays a member list, a subset of related members that belong to a
dimension. The member that is currently selected is displayed in the Selected Entity Value
O ly
text box. Parent members are displayed as folders. You can click the plus sign next to a
parent member to view its children.

l & On
n a e
Member lists can reduce the time spent browsing the hierarchy of members. For example, if
you frequently use Italy, France, and UK in the point of view for the Entity dimension, you

e r s
can create a member list named European Region that includes the frequently used
t U
members. You can then select a European member from this list instead of browsing

I n
through the entire hierarchy of the Entity dimension.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-23
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Financial Management provides system-defined member lists, whose names are

enclosed in brackets; for example, [Descendants] and [Children]. You can filter system-
defined member lists by entering a parent in the text box to the right of the member list
drop-down list. For example, if you select the [Descendants] member list and type
California as the parent, the member list is filtered to show only descendants of
California.

To select members:
• Perform an action:
• From the member list, select a member .
• In the Selected Entity Value text box, enter all or part of a member label and click
the find next or find previous button to search for a member.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Managing Documents
Manage Documents

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Managing Documents
c l
documents in applications. r a
The Manage Documents task provides a central location from which you can manage

O ly
• Work with Tasklists, data grids, data forms, system reports, links, related content, and
custom documents
l & On
a e
• Create, edit, load, extract, and delete documents, add them to your Favorites
n
t e r U s
section, and create document folders (By selecting the All tab, you can delete or
extract documents, create folders for them, or add them to Favorites all at once

n
instead of working with each document tab in turn.)
I
c l e
• Create public and private documents
• Integrate external documents (custom documents, related content, and links) into

r a
Financial Management applications

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-25
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

To access Manage Documents:

• Select Administration > Manage Documents.

Custom Documents
You can attach one or more documents to cells in data grids, data forms, and Process
Control cells. You must first upload the documents to the Financial Management
database. The documents are stored in the database, and you can apply security
classes to them.
You can load different types of documents into the Financial Management database; for
example, Excel documents (.xls), Word documents (.doc), text (.txt) files, and
PowerPoint (.ppt) files. Uploaded documents are called custom documents. When you
click the Attach button on the Cell Text dialog box in a Web data form or a data grid, you
can select from the list of custom documents.
You load, extract, organize, view, and delete custom documents from the Custom
Documents tab in the same way that you work with Financial Management
documents.To attach or extract custom documents to or from the server, you must be
assigned the Manage Custom Documents security role or be an administrator.

m y
Related Content
d e
applications. These reports are referred to as related content.
c a
You can include Financial Reporting and Web Analysis reports in Financial Management

A
You create related content documents from the Related Content tab of the Manage
e
c l
Documents task. A related content document serves as a link to a resource in another
Hyperion product. For example, you can view a report from Financial Reporting in HTML

r a
format or as a PDF file. You can add the item to a TaskList or launch it separately from the
Related Content menu in the view pane. You must be assigned the appropriate security
rights to view the content. O ly
l & On
Links
n a e
e r
You can create links to files or Web pages. You can add links to TaskLists and to the
s
Favorites section. You can also launch them from the view pane. If you have a link to a
t U
Web page that is time-consuming to open, you can have the system prompt you before
opening the page.
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe Financial Management user interface components

• Describe the business process (tasks) in a typical monthly reporting
financial cycle
• Describe metadata and dimensions
• Log on to Workspace
• Access Financial Management through Workspace
• Describe the user interface for Financial Management
• Describe the difference between Basic and Advanced user modes
• Select dimension members using the Point of View (POV) Selector
m y
• Manage documents in Financial Management
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 2-27
 Module 1 Navigating Financial Management
Lesson 2 Navigating Financial Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 2

Entering and Calculating Data 2

Overview
In this module, you learn how to enter and calculate your data using
data grids and forms.
Lessons in this unit include:
• Entering Data Using Data Grids
• Loading Data
• Entering Data in Data Forms

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 3

Entering Data Using Data Grids 3

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe data grids
• Access data grids
• Set the point of view
• Select members and dimensions
• Save data grid settings
• Enter, edit, and calculate data in data grids
m y
• Enter cell text and line-item detail
d e
c
• Retrieve data from Financial Data Quality Management a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

m y
d e
c a
Data Grids Overview
e A
c l
You use data grids to manually enter, view, and edit data in Financial Management

r a
applications. After loading data, you can calculate it, translate it to other currencies, or
consolidate it.
O ly
NOTE

l & On
Your ability to edit data in a data grid is based on the security rights that the
a e
administrator grants you.
n
t e r U s
I n
The point of view determines what dimensions and data are displayed in the data grid.
Dimensions are displayed in rows and columns. You can save the settings as a grid file

l e
and reopen the grid, rather than resetting the grid settings. You can also load and extract

c
data grids from the Manage Documents area.

r a
O
3-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Accessing Data Grids

Manage Documents button

m y
New Data Grid button
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
Accessing Data Grids
e A
c l
To access the list of data grids, you can use either the Browser View or the Documents

r a
area in the POV. If the data grid is in a folder, you must drill into that folder. Each data cell

O ly
in an application represents an intersection of dimension members.

l & On
Your access to data cells is determined by the security class assigned to the dimension
members for that intersection. Your right to create data grids is also determined by your
assigned security class.
n a e
To open data grids:
t e r U s
I n
1. Click the Manage Documents button.

l e
2. Perform an action:

c
• Select the Data Grids tab to view a list of all available data grids.

r a• Select the All tab to view a list of all documents.

O 3. In the Document column, select a data grid name.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-3

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Changing the Grid Layout and Display

Click the Grid Settings button.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Changing the Grid Layout and Display
c l
r a
Click the Grid Settings button on the toolbar to access the Grid Settings dialog box. You
use the Grid Settings dialog box to change the grid layout and display.

O ly
Layout
l & On
Dimensions.
n a e
The Layout tab contains three areas: Page Dimensions, Row Dimensions, and Column

t e r U s
You can move dimensions between areas. For example, you can move the Period

I n
dimension from the Page Dimensions area to the Column Dimensions area to view the
periods in columns. The dimensions that you select for the page area are displayed on

l e
the grid POV.

c
r a
O
3-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

To set grid rows and columns:

1. Select Administration > Manage Documents.
2. Select a data grid from the list.
3. Click the Grid Settings button .
4. On the Layout tab, in the Page Dimensions area, select the dimensions for the rows
and columns.
5. Click the arrow buttons to move the dimensions:
• To move a dimension to the Column Dimensions area, click the right arrow button
.
• To move a dimension to the Row Dimensions area, click the down arrow button
.
• To return a dimension to the Page Dimensions area, click the left arrow button
.
• To move dimensions between the row and column areas, use the arrow keys.
6. Click OK.
m y
d e
Display
c a
Use the Display Options tab to select cell, label, row suppression, page size, and scale
options.

e A
c l
You can select whether to view the data, the calculation status, or the process review
level of the data in data grid cells. The calculation status indicates, for example, whether

r a
data must be calculated, translated, or consolidated. The review levels indicate the

O ly
process management level for combinations of data called “process units.” You can
easily toggle between the data and the calculation status and review level. The data grid
& On
is automatically refreshed to reflect changes.
l
a e
When you enable descriptions, they are displayed in the language that you specified in
n
t e r s
the User Preferences dialog box. If you select to view both labels and descriptions, the
dimension member is displayed as Label - Description. For entities, the member is
U
I n
displayed as Parent.Entity - Description,” where Description is the description of the
entity. In addition, you can select a scale value to determine how data is displayed in a

l e
data grid. For example, if the currency U.S. dollars (USD) is defined with a scale of 3, an

c
amount of 300,000 USD loaded into the system is displayed as 300.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-5
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Selecting Members for Dimensions

POV bar

Click to select members for rows and columns.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Selecting Members for Dimensions
c l
a
You can customize the members displayed in the rows, columns, and point of view:
r
O ly
• Select the members for the POV dimensions by clicking the links displayed on the
POV bar.

l & On
• Select members for the rows and columns by clicking the dimension name in the row
or column heading area.
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Selecting Members in the Point of View

Find next
Find previous
Clear selected value

Search area

Top parent

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Selecting Members in the Point of View
c l
r a
The Member Selector displays a list of available members. The currently selected
member is displayed in the Selected Entity Value text box. Parent members are

O ly
displayed as folders. You click the plus sign next to a parent member to view its children.

& On
The Member Selector displays the list of available members based on your security
l
n a e
rights. For example, if you have been granted rights to the California member, but not to
the Connecticut member, then you see only the entities for California.
NOTE
t e r U s
I n
For POV dimensions, you can select only one member. For column and row
dimensions, you can select multiple members or a member list.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-7
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

To set the point of view:

1. On the POV bar, click a dimension.
2. Perform one of the following actions:
• Select the member.
• In the Dimension Value text box, enter the member label.
3. Click OK.
TIP
It is not necessary to click OK after selecting each member. You can select
multiple members in the POV selection area. Click the plus (+) sign to display
additional dimension members.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Selecting Members from Member Lists

Member list displays children of GrossMargin.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Selecting Members from Member Lists
c l
r a
Member lists display a subset of related members that belong to one dimension.
Financial Management provides a number of system-defined member lists, such as

O ly
[Descendants] and [Children]. The [Hierarchy] member list contains all members of a

& On
dimension. System-defined member list names are enclosed in brackets ([]).

l
n a e
Member lists can reduce the time that you spend browsing the hierarchy of members.
For example, if you frequently use Italy, France, and UK in the point of view for the Entity

t e r U s
dimension, you can create a member list named European Region. You can then select
from this list instead of browsing through the entire hierarchy of the Entity dimension.

I n
When you select members for rows or columns, you can use member lists in two ways:

l e
• Select a member list from the member list drop-down list, and then, in the Selector
c
area, select the desired members to place them in the selected values list.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-9
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

• Select a member list from the member list drop-down list and do not select a
member. Rows or columns are created for all members of the selected member list.
You can filter member lists by using a top member (parent). The example in the slide
shows the Account dimension. If you select the [Children] member list and enter
GrossMargin as the top member, the selector displays descendants of the GrossMargin
member.

To select members from member lists:

1. Perform an action:
• Select a member from a member list other than the default [Hierarchy] list: From
the drop-down list in the Selector area, select the member list.
• Filter the list by using a top member: In the text box, from the Selector area, enter
the member name and click Enter.
Reminder: You can remove a dimension member by clicking the
Clear button.
The updated list displays the top member and its descendants.
2. Click OK to apply the changes. m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Selecting Members for Columns and Rows

A row or column is displayed in the

grid for each member that you select.

Click to select
members for rows
and columns in
the grid
dimension header
area.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
Selecting Members for Columns and Rows
e A
c l
You use the Member Selector to select the members to be displayed in the rows and

r a
columns. A separate row or column is displayed in the grid for each member that you
select.
O ly
NOTE

l & On
For POV dimensions, you can select only one member. For column and row

a e
dimensions, you can select multiple members or a member list.
n
t e r U s
n
To select multiple members for columns and rows:
I
c l e
1. In the grid dimension header area, click the dimension for the row or the column.
2. Select members:

r a
• Expand the dimension members and select a default member list.

O • Select the member list from the drop-down list

Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-11

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

3. Click the members to move them to the Selected Values area.

4. Optional: Select a member and click the up arrow button or the down arrow
button to reorganize the list in the selected values area.
5. Optional: Select the member and click the Clear button to remove a dimension
member from the Selected Values area.
6. Click OK to apply the changes.

To search for dimension members:

1. On the POV bar, click the dimension to display the Member Selector.
2. In the Selected Dimension Value text box, enter full or partial search criteria.
You can search by using wildcards. For example, to find the entity named
Massachusetts, type ma*. The search defaults to the first member. When you click
Enter, it moves to the next member that fits that criterion.
3. Click the Find Next button to display the next dimension member that contains the
search criteria.

m
4. Repeat step 3 until you find the dimension member, or click the find previous button
y
to view a previous member in the dimension.
d e
5. Click OK.
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Saving Data Grid Settings

Click the Save Settings button.

m y
Private data grids are displayed in the
Documents List of the users who created them.
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Saving Data Grid Settings
c l
r a
You can save frequently used data grid settings. By saving those settings, you can
reduce the time spent on selecting the dimensions for the rows and columns.
O ly
To save a grid and grid settings:
l & On
n a e
1. In a data grid, click the Save Settings button to open the save document page.

t e r U s
2. Enter a name and a description for the grid settings.

I n
The name can have a maximum of 20 characters, including spaces. The description
can have a maximum of 255 characters, including spaces.

l e
3. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class for the grid.
c
r a
4. Optional: If you want the grid to be a private grid, select the Private check box.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-13
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

5. Optional: If you want to overwrite the existing file, select the Overwrite existing file
check box.
TIP
Overwriting the existing file is a good way to move grids from one folder to
another.

6. Click OK.

To delete a grid and grid settings:

1. Select Administration > Manage Documents or click the manage documents toolbar
button and then select the Data Grids tab.
2. Perform an action:
• Click the folder from which you want to delete a grid.
• If you want to delete a grid from the Root directory, skip this step and proceed to
step 3.

m y
3. From the list of grids, select the check box next to the grid that you want to delete and
click Delete.
d e
NOTE

c a
You can also delete a folder, but you must first delete any grids in the folder.

e A
4. Click OK.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Entering and Editing Data

Submit Data Refresh Data, discarding unsaved changes

(saves data)

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
Entering and Editing Data
e A
c l
Data grids provide a spreadsheet-like user interface for entering data. You use the

r a
Submit Data button to save your changes to the database. The Reset Data button

O ly
refreshes the form with the most recent data from the database, discarding unsaved
changes.

l & On
Cell Color
n a e
t e r
The cell color is a visual guide to the contents of the cell:

U s
• Green—Green cells contain calculated data. Calculated cells are read-only and thus

n
do not accept user input.
I
c l e
• Light Yellow—Light yellow cells accept data entry.
• Orange—Orange cells are at invalid intersections of dimension members. You

r a
cannot enter data in invalid cells.

O • Dark Yellow—Dark yellow cells contain data that is modified but not saved.
• Beige—Beige cells contains locked data. Locked data cannot be edited.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-15

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Saving Data and Parent Totals

When you save data, Financial Management automatically calculates totals for the
parent members in the dimension hierarchy. For example, if you enter and save data for
the Hotel and Meals members, a new total is calculated for their parent Total Expenses.
For the Entity dimension, the focus is consolidation. Consolidation sums data from the
children and aggregates the data to a parent. Data does not aggregate to a parent
member until consolidation occurs.

Clearing Data
You can type the text NODATA in a cell to clear data from the database after it is saved.
For example, you might enter or load data in an incorrect intersection and want to clear
the data without entering zeros in the database. NODATA is the only text that can be
entered in a cell in Financial Management.

To enter or edit data:

1. Open a data grid.
2. Select the cell where you want to enter or edit data.
m y
TIP

d e
To select multiple cells, press the Shift key and click in a cell or row to add to

c a
the current selection. For example, to select all 12 periods in a grid, you click

A
in period 1, use the scroll bar to scroll to the right, and Shift-click in period 12.

e
c l
3. Enter a value in the cell and press Enter.

r a
The cells where you entered or edited data are displayed in
yellow.
O ly
& On
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have entered or edited all necessary data.
l
a e
5. Perform one of the following actions:
n
t e r U s
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.

changes.
I n
• Click the Reset Data button to refresh the database without saving the

c l e
r a
O
3-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Filling Multiple Cells

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Filling Multiple Cells
c l
r a
At times, you may have to enter the same data in multiple cells of a row. You can
accomplish this task by selecting a range of cells and then selecting the Fill option.

O ly
You can select multiple cells either by dragging the mouse pointer over the cells or by
& On
clicking the cells while pressing the Shift key. You can select an entire row by clicking the
l
row heading.

n a e
e r s
To enter data by using the Fill option:
t U
n
1. Enter data in an input cell of a row.
I
c l e
2. Press the Shift key and select the cell whose data you want to replicate.
3. Select the destination cell or cells, right-click, and select Fill.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-17
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Spreading Data

You can spread data from summary periods to base periods.

2 Click the Submit Data button.

1
Enter amount
in summary
time period.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Spreading Data
c l
r a
In data grids, you can enter data in parent-level members of the Period dimension and
spread the data among the base periods. For example, you can enter an amount of

O ly
75,000 in the Quarter 1 member that contains the months of January, February, and
March. Then, you can distribute this amount among the three months.

l & On
After entering the data in the parent-level members, you must submit the data to spread
a e
it among the base periods. Click the Submit Data button to save the data to the
n
database.

t e r U s
If the base periods are blank, the data is distributed evenly across the periods. If the

I n
base periods already contain data, the data is distributed proportionally. For example, if
the months of January, February, and March list 3, 3, and 4 as the existing data, entering

l e
100 in the Quarter1 member distributes 30, 30, and 40 to January, February, and March,
c
respectively.

r a
O
3-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

To enter data into summar y-level time periods:

1. Open a data grid.
2. Click the summary-level time period cell where you want to enter or edit data; for
example, Quarter or Half Year.
3. Enter a value in the cell and press the Tab key.
4. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.
• Click the Reset Data button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-19
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Calculating Data

Sales = UnitsSold * Price

Right-click a cell to access the Calculate option.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Calculating Data
c l
r a
Your application can include calculation rules that are not based on a parent-child
relationship. For example, a rule calculates the value for the Salaries account by

O ly
multiplying the HeadCount account by the SalaryRate account. Values for accounts

l & On
calculated by rules are not calculated automatically when you save your data. You must
use the Calculate feature to calculate values for these accounts. You access the

a e
Calculate feature by right-clicking the cell whose value you want to calculate.

n
t e r U s
When you calculate data, calculation rules run for the selected scenario, year, period,
entity, and value. All prior time periods within the same year that were not previously

I n
calculated are also calculated. For example, if you calculate data for June, data that was
not previously calculated for January to May is calculated.

c l e
r a
O
3-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

The Calculate option is available only for cells whose data has changed since they were
last calculated. You can use the Force Calculate option to calculate cells whose data has
not changed. For example, a cell might use a formula that calculates the current period
value based on the previous period value. If the value for the previous period has
changed, you could use Force Calculate to recalculate the current period value.

To calculate data:
1. In the data grid, select the point of view.
2. Select the cell whose value you want to calculate.
3. Right-click and perform one of the following actions:
• Select Calculate to calculate the selected cells.
• Select Force Calculate to force calculation to run for all selected cells.
• Select Calculate Contribution to calculate contribution values.
• Select Force Calculate Contribution to force calculation to run for all selected
contribution values.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-21
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Adding Cell Text and Documents

Default length limitation is 8000

Attach documents

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Adding Cell Text and Documents
c l
option. r a
You can add text notes and attach documents to the cells in a grid by using the Cell Text

O ly
Text notes provide additional information about the cell data. For example, use text notes

l & On
to communicate with reviewers or to explain the assumptions behind your data. You set

n a e
the maximum length for cell text in the Application Settings section of Metadata Manager.
The default limit is 8,000 characters.

t e r U s
To add cell text:
I
1. Open a data grid.n
c l e
2. Select the cell to which you want to add text.

r a
3. Right-click and select Cell Text.

O
3-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

4. Enter the cell text, up to 8,000 characters.

5. Click OK.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add cell text to other cells.
7. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.
• Click the Reset Data button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.
The cells are displayed with a blue border.

To attach documents to cells:

1. Select the input cell to which you want to attach a document.
2. Right-click and select Cell Text.
3. Click Attach.
4. From the list of custom documents, select one or more documents to associate with
the cell and click Attach.
m y
NOTE
d e
c a
You cannot add documents that you have made private. In order to attach a
document, such as a Word or Excel document, you must first add that
A
document to the Custom Documents area. You must have the Manage
e
l
Custom Documents role to load custom documents.

c
5. Click OK. r a
O ly
6. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data button
l & On to save the data.

n a e
changes.
t e r
• Click the Reset Data button

U s
to refresh the database without saving the

TIP
I n
To detach a document from a cell, select the document and click Detach.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-23
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

To view cell text:

1. Select the input cell whose cell text you want to view.
2. Right-click and select Cell Text.
3. View the cell text.
4. Click Cancel.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to view additional cell text.

To view cell text attachments:

1. Select the input cell whose cell text attachment you want to view.
2. Right-click and select Cell Text.
3. Select the document attachment that you want to view, and follow the Microsoft
download instructions.
4. In the Cell Text dialog box, click Cancel.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Adding Line-Item Detail

Adds a new row

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Adding Line-Item Detail
c l
r a
In a data grid, you can add line-item detail to accounts for which line-item detail is
enabled. This option is available only for base-level accounts and scenarios (valid
O ly
intersections) that accept line-item detail (where the member attribute UsesLineItems is
selected).

l & On
To add line-item detail:
n a e
1. Open a data grid.
t e r U s
I n
2. Select the cell to which you want to add line-item detail.

l e
3. Right-click and select Cell Line Item Detail.

c
4. Click Add.

r a
5. Enter a description and a value for the line-item detail.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-25
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

6. Enter as many line items as necessary, and perform one of the following actions:
• Press Enter.
• Select a different cell to see the effect of the change.
• Enter zero as the value to clear line-item detail.
7. Click OK.
8. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.
• Click the Reset Data button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.
A cell with line-item detail displays the total of the rows of line-item
detail. Cells with line-item detail have a red border.

To view line-item detail:

1. Open a data grid.
2. Select the cell whose line-item detail you want to view.
m y
3. Right-click and select Cell Line Item Detail.
d e
4. View the line-item detail.
c a
5. Click Close.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Retrieving Data from Financial Data Quality

Management
ƒ You can drill back from data grid cells in Financial Management to
Financial Data Quality Management.
ƒ Source documents for data are archived in Financial Data Quality
Management.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Retrieving Data from Financial Data Quality Management
c
r a
If you use Financial Data Quality Management to load data, you can drill from Web data
grids to Financial Data Quality Management to view the source used to load data. You
O ly
can view additional information about the data load, including POV information, load date

load.
l & On
and time, drilling through to intercompany transactions, and the user who performed the

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-27
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

To drill through to Financial Data Quality Management from a data

grid:
1. From a data grid, select an input cell that was configured for Financial Data Quality
Management.
2. Right-click and select Audit Intersection to launch Financial Data Quality
Management with the point of view for the selected cell.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe data grids

• Access data grids
• Set the point of view
• Select members and dimensions
• Save data grid settings
• Enter, edit, and calculate data in data grids
• Enter cell text and line-item detail
• Retrieve data from Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 3-29
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 3 Entering Data Using Data Grids

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-30 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 4

Loading Data 4

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe the format of a load file
• Load data from a file
• Extract data
• Export data with Extended Analytics
• Copy data within a database from one location to another
• Remove data from a database
m y
• Transfer data using Data Synchronization
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Data Load Files

ƒ Load files are divided into

sections with an exclamation
point as the section delimiter.
ƒ Sections can be in any order in
the file.
ƒ The default column order is
Scenario, Year, Period, View,
Entity, Value, Account, ICP,
Custom1, Custom2, Custom3,
Custom4.
ƒ Fields for the items within a
section are delimited with any of
these characters:
,~@ #$^&_|:;?\
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Data Load Files
c l
r a
You can populate a Financial Management application by loading a data file. A data load file
contains sections that map the file data to Financial Management dimensions.
O ly
You can load multiple data files. For example, you can load multiple files to consolidate data

l & On
from multiple ledger systems, such as Oracle, SAP, and Peoplesoft.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Group Dimension Section

Group section

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Group Dimension Section
c l
r a
The group dimension section sets the point of view for the load data in the data section.
For the example on the slide, the group dimension section specifies that the lines of data

O ly
in the data section represent load data for the EastSales entity and the Actual scenario
for January 2005.

l & On
n a e
Only the Period dimension can have a specified range. You must define one member for
all other dimensions specified in the group dimension section.

e r s
The following example shows how you specify a range of periods from January to March:
t U
I n
!Period = January...March

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-3
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Data Section

Data section

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Data Section
c l
r a
The data section contains lines representing data values for one or more periods.
Typically, you specify accounts in the data section. For the example on the slide, the line

O ly
of business and the market for each value are also specified in the data section.

& On
If you specify a range of periods in the group dimension section, you can include multiple
l
a e
values on each line, as in this example:

n
!Period = Jan...Mar
!Data
t e r U s
I n
Actual,2005,Periodic,EastSales,USD,Purchases,[ICP_
None],Network,Customer2,[None],[None],50000,60000,70000

c l e
r a
O
4-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Line-Item Detail Section

Enclose line-item descriptions in quotation marks.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Line-Item Detail Section
c l
r a
Data load files can also contain sections for line-item detail. Data records for line-item
detail include a field for the description before the data value. You must enclose the

O ly
description in quotation marks. Data records for line-item detail cannot include values for
more than one period.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-5
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Changing Column Order

Specifies the order

of the dimensions
in the data section

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Changing Column Order
c l
specifies the default column order:
r a
You can change the order of dimension members in data records. The following syntax

O ly
!Column_Order = Scenario, Year, Period, View, Entity, Value, Account,
& On
ICP, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3, Custom4
l
a e
The default dimension sequence is optional. You can change the sequence to meet your
n
t e r s
needs, and you can specify multiple column-order sections in a data file. Each
subsequent column-order section overrides the previously defined section.
U
TIP
I n
l e
The column order impacts load performance. To maintain optimal performance,
first list the Scenario, Year, Entity, and Period dimensions.
c
r a
O
4-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Loading Data into Applications

ƒ Use the Browse button to identify multiple data load files.

ƒ The files are loaded in sequential order.
ƒ A Progress window shows the progress of each load.
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Loading Data into Applications
c l
r a
In Financial Management, you use the Load Data option under Load Tasks to load data
into an application. When you select this option, the Load Data page is displayed. This
O ly
page provides options for specifying the data load file.

l & On
Financial Management provides four options for loading data files into applications:
• Merge
n a e
• Replace
t e r U s
n
• Replace by Security
I
c l e
• Accumulate

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-7
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Merge Option

Application Data Load File

Account Value Account Value
Sales 100 Sales 50
Returns 20 Purchases 30
Purchases No Data

Results of Load
Account Value
Sales 50
Returns 20
P urchases 30

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Merge Option
c l
a
Select this option to overwrite the data in the application with the data in the load file.
r
O ly
• If the data load file includes multiple values for the same point of view, the value for
the last entry is loaded.

l & On
• Data in the application that is not changed by the data load file remains in the
application.
n a e
t e r U s
The Merge option relates to the Scenario, Entity, and Period dimensions, as well as valid
intersections of the Account dimension.

I n
c l e
r a
O
4-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Replace Option

Application Data Load File

Account Value Account Value
Sales 100 Sales 50
Returns 20 Purchases 30
Purchases No Data

Results of Load
Account Value
Sales 50
Returns No Data
P urchases 30

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Replace Option
c l
r a
Select this option to replace the data in the application with the data in the load file. The
Replace option clears all account values from the application for each unique

O ly
combination of Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, and Value. After the account values are

from the data file.

l & On
cleared (including valid intersections of custom dimensions), load file values are loaded

n a e
Replace by Security Option
t e r U s
Use this option to perform a data load (in Replace mode) in which only the members to

I n
which you have access are loaded.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-9
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Accumulate Option

Application Data Load File

Account Value Account Value
Sales 100 Sales 50
Returns 20 Purchases 30
Purchases No Data

Results of Load
Account Value
Sales 150
Returns 20
P urchases 30

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Accumulate Option
c l
r a
Select this option to accumulate the data in the application with the data in the load file.
For each unique point of view in the data file, the application and load file values are

O ly
added and the totals are loaded into the application.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Accumulate Within File Option

ƒ Merge with Accumulate within File

ƒ Replace with Accumulate within File
Application Da ta Load File
Ac count Value Ac count Value
Sales 100 Sales 50
Returns 20 Sales 60
Purchases No Data

Results of Load
Account Value
Sales 110
Returns 20

y
Purchases No Data

Merge with Accumulate within File

e m
a d
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

A c
Accumulate Within File Option
c l e
r a
The Accumulate Within File option is used with the Merge and Replace options. When a
data load file contains multiple lines of data for the same point of view and the

O ly
Accumulate Within File option is selected, the lines are totaled and the total is loaded into
the application.

l & On
Load Option Combination

n a e
Description
Merge with Accumulate
Within File
t e r s
All values for the same point of view in the data file are added,
and the data in the application is overwritten with the total.
U
Within File
I
Replace with Accumulate
n The application values are cleared. All values for the same
point of view in the data file are added, and the total is loaded.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-11
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

NOTE
If a file contains ownership data or shares data, you must select File Contains
Ownership Data to avoid errors when the file is loaded.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Extracting Data

You can select multiple members for

these dimensions.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Extracting Data
c l
r a
You access the Extract Data task under Extract Tasks. You can extract base-level input
data and some calculated data from a Financial Management application. When you
O ly
extract data, it is saved as an ASCII file. You are prompted for the file name and location.

l & On
By default, data files have the DAT file extension. After you extract data to a data file, you
can view and modify it in a text editor.

n a e
When you extract data, you must specify a member for the Scenario and Year

e r s
dimensions. You can specify one or more members for the Period, Entity, and Account
t U
dimensions. You can also extract the following types of calculated data:

I n
• Consolidated data for parent entities

l e
• Base accounts and custom dimension members that are calculated by rules
c
r a
• Parent accounts that intersect with their respective custom top member and [ICP
Top] member. If the CustomTop metadata attribute is blank or ALL, then the [None]
O member is used.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-13

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Only valid data intersections are extracted. For each unique point of view, data is
presented in a single data line in the file. Group headings are not created.
TIP
The Extract Data functionality is useful as a means to verify data in an application.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Exporting Data with Extended Analytics

An Extended Analytics star schema enables you to use Essbase to

analyze data and produce reports.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Exporting Data with Extended Analytics
c l
r a
You use Extended Analytics to export data from the Financial Management database to
a star schema. You then use Integration Services to import the data to an Essbase
database.
O ly
NOTE
l & On
a e
You must be assigned the security role of Extended Analytics or Administrator to

n
t e r
access Extended Analytics.

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-15
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

The following table describes the fields on the Extended Analytics window:

Field Description
Template Create a new template to save your POV settings or choose a
template from the drop-down list. You can save, delete, or reset
a template.
Destination Database Select the database to which you are exporting the star schema.
(DSN) Make sure that the destination database is not the same as the
source database.
Relational Table Prefix Identifies the tables for the star schema.
Aggregation Option Select the schema format:
• Standard (Used for the Standard, Metadata Only, and
Selected Metadata Only aggregation types)
• Metadata Only aggregation types.
• Metadata Only (Extracts metadata only)
• Selected Metadata Only (Extracts only the metadata for the
selected dimension members)
• Essbase
• Data Warehouse
m y
Exclude Dynamic Accounts
e
Select this check box to include dynamic accounts in the star
schema.
d
c a
To export data with Extended Analytics:

e A
1. Open the application.
c l
a
2. Select Tasks > Administration > Extended Analytics.
r
O ly
3. Perform one of the following tasks:

& On
• From the Template drop-down list, select a saved POV template.

l
a e
• Create a new template and select the POV dimension members to export.

n
t e r U s
4. From the Destination Database (DSN) drop-down list, select the database to which
you are exporting the star schema.

I n
5. In the Relational Table Prefix text box, enter the prefix that identifies the tables for the

c l e
star schema.

r a
O
4-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

NOTE
The prefix can contain up to 10 alphanumeric characters and must start with a
letter. The default prefix is the name of the application.

6. From the Aggregation Option drop-down list, select the type of aggregation to
perform on the data.
7. Optional: Clear the Exclude Dynamic Accounts check box to include dynamic accounts
in the star schema.
8. Select Create Star Schema tab.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-17
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Copying Data

The number of source and destination periods must be the same.

You can increase or

m y
decrease the copied
values by a factor.
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Copying Data
c l
r a
You can copy data from a specific scenario, year, period, or list of periods to a specific
destination. The frequency of the source and destination periods must be the same. If
O ly
you copy a list of periods, the number of source and destination periods must be the

l & On
same. You can copy values from the <Entity Currency> member of the Value dimension,
or you can include system and exchange rate accounts.

n a e
You can also define a factor by which the data that you are copying should be multiplied.

e r s
The source amounts are multiplied by the factor before the data is copied to the
t U
destination. For example, you can increase all Actual 2005 data values by 15% when

I n
you copy them to Forecast 2006. The multiplication factor that you define is not applied

l e
to system accounts. You can use the Mode option to specify how data is copied into an
application. You can select to merge, replace, or accumulate the data. The copy options
c
a
and load data options are the same.
r
O
4-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

To copy data:
1. Select the Browser View.
2. Click Tasks > Data Tasks > Database Management.
3. Select the Copy tab.
4. Make the appropriate selections.
5. Click Copy Data.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-19
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Removing Data

You can remove (clear) data from a specified range in the database.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Removing Data
c l
r a
You can remove (clear) data for selected entities and accounts for a specific scenario,
year, period, or list of periods. When you clear data, base entities, parent entities, and
base-level accounts are cleared.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Transferring Data

NA Consol application Sales Report application

Sales Revenue
Mapping table
Sales Revenue
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Transferring Data
c l
r a
You use data synchronization to transfer data automatically from source applications to

O ly
destination applications. Data synchronization provides filters for selecting data needed
for other applications. You can schedule data synchronization to run during off-peak

l & On
business hours, and you can view data flows between applications after a data

BPM Architect.
n a e
synchronization has occurred. Data Synchronizations are create by administrators using

t e r U s
For example, NA Consol is the master (source) application where all the data is stored

I n
for consolidations; it contains both balance sheet and income statement data. You use
the Sales Report (destination) application solely to meet sales reporting needs. The data

l e
needed to generate these reports resides in the Net Income hierarchy in the Account

c
dimension of the NA Consol application. You use data synchronization to transfer the

r a
data from the Net Income hierarchy of the NA Consol application to the Net Income
hierarchy of the Sales Report application.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-21
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

To access data synchronization:

1. Log on to Workspace.
2. Select Navigate > Administer > Data Synchronization.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe the format of a load file

• Load data from a file
• Extract data
• Export data with Extended Analytics
• Copy data within a database from one location to another
• Remove data from a database
• Transfer data using Data Synchronization

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 4-23
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 4 Loading Data

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 5

Entering Data in Data Forms 5

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe data forms
• Enter data into data forms
• Calculate data in data forms
• Add cell text, documents, and line-item detail to data forms
• Access linked forms from data forms
• Add members to forms
m y
• Suppress data in forms
d e
• Export to and import from spreadsheets
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Working with Data Forms

With data forms, you can perform these tasks:

ƒ Enter data
ƒ Change the POV bar for dimensions defined by the
administrator
ƒ Enter cell text
ƒ Link to other forms

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Working with Data Forms
c l
r a
Data forms are templates that use a familiar spreadsheet-style layout. You enter data in
cells just as you do in Excel and other spreadsheet programs. You cannot add rows and
O ly
columns to, or remove them from, a data form.

l & On
The following table shows the toolbar buttons that are available when you open a data
form:

n a e
Toolbar Button

t e r
Function

U s
I n Submit

c l e Refresh

O ra Calculate

5-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Toolbar Button Function

Force calculate

Cell text

Instructions

Print

Export to Excel

Import from Excel

Suppress rows

Suppress columns

m y
Suppress lines

d e
Close
c a
(Available for linked
forms only)

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-3
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Accessing Data Forms

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Accessing Data Forms
c l
r a
The list of available data forms displays the name, description, and last-modified date.
Forms can also be included in folders to organize them in an application. You can open,

O ly
view, enter, edit, and save data only in forms for which you have security rights. Only an

& On
administrator can create, load, and delete forms.

l
To access data forms:
n a e
e r s
Perform one of the following actions:
t U
form. I n
• Select Administration > Manage Documents, select the Data Forms tab, and select a

c l e
• Click the Manage Documents toolbar button , select the Data Forms tab, and select

r a a form.

O • In the Browser View area, click Documents > Data Forms and select a form.

5-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Viewing Form Instructions

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Form Instructions
c l
r a
Before entering data in a data form, you can view instructions about the form. If the
administrator did not create instructions, a message indicates that no instructions were
defined.
O ly
To view data form instructions:
l & On
1. Open a data form.
n a e
t e r U s
2. On the toolbar, click the Instructions button .

I n
3. Read the instructions, and click the Close button.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-5
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Setting the Point of View

You cannot change the dimension member.

You can change the dimension member.

POV bar.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Setting the Point of View
c l
r a
Before entering data in a data form, you must set the point of view for the form. If a
dimension is not displayed in the rows or columns, it is displayed on the POV bar.

O ly
Data forms are configured so that you can change members only for specific dimensions
& On
in the point of view. These dimensions are displayed as links on the form, highlighted in
l
n a e
light blue. When you select a link, the dimensions that you can change are shown as
underlined links. For example, if the Entity and Scenario dimensions are displayed as

t e r U s
links, you can select members for these dimensions in the point of view.

I n
c l e
r a
O
5-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Selecting Point of View Members

Validate selected value

Member list

Members available in the POV Selector area

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Selecting Point of View Members
c l
r a
You can change the point of view by clicking the POV link or the links for the individual
dimensions. Based on your security rights, you see only those dimensions for which you

O ly
have security access. For example, if you are allowed to enter data only into the

displayed in the Selector area.

l & On
California.1000 and California.West Sales entities, then only these two entities are

n a e
You can also select member lists from the drop-down list in the Selector area, such as

defined member lists.

t e r U s
[Descendants], [Children], and [Base]. The administrator can create additional user-

I n
c l e
To change the point of view in a data form:
1. Open a data form.

r a
2. On the POV bar, click a dimension.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-7
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

3. Perform one of the following actions:

• Select the member.
• Enter the member label In the Selected Entity Value text box.
4. Click OK.
TIP
It is not necessary to click OK after selecting each member. You can continue
selecting members in the POV selector area until you have selected all members.

5. Optional: If additional members are available for the dimension, expand them by
clicking the plus (+) sign.
6. To validate the member or member list syntax, click the Validate button .

To select a member by using a member list:

1. Select the member list from the drop-down list in the Selector area.
TIP
m y
The [Hierarchy] member list contains all members of a dimension.

d e
c a
2. To filter the list by using a top member, enter the member name in the text box in the
Selector area and click Enter.

e A
l
The updated list displays the top member and its descendants.
c
a
3. To clear a dimension member, click the Clear button.
r
O ly
4. When you have finished selecting members, click OK to apply the changes.

To search for dimension members:

l & On
n a e
1. Click the POV bar click the dimension to display the Member Selector.

e r s
2. In the Selected Dimension Value text box, enter full or partial search criteria.
t U
I n
You can search by using wildcards. For example, to find the entity named
Massachusetts, type ma*. The search defaults to the first member. When you click

l e
Enter, the search moves to the next member that fits the search criteria.
c
r a
3. Click the Find Next button
the search criteria you entered.
to display the next dimension member that contains

O
5-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

4. Repeat step 3 until you find the dimension member, or click the Find Previous
button to view a previous member in the dimension.
5. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-9
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Entering Data

You can enter data only in base-level cells. Calculated

and consolidated accounts do not accept data entry.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Entering Data
c l
r a
You enter or edit data in predefined data forms. You can manually enter data into input
accounts for base entities. Calculated and consolidated accounts do not accept data
O ly
entry because their values come from other sources.

l & On
Saved data is not automatically calculated or consolidated. For example, a company

n a e
called USA East has three dependents: East GF, East TN, and East FB. You enter
values into the dependent entities. When you consolidate the data, the value in USA

e r s
East is the total of the values of its three dependents.
t U
I n
In order to enter data in a data form, you must have access to the security class for the
form and security rights for the data in the cells.

c l e
r a
O
5-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

To enter data:
1. Open a data form.
2. Change the POV dimensions as necessary.
3. Enter data into input (off-white) cells.
If you want to clear a cell, you can delete its contents or enter NODATA.
4. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.
• Click the Refresh Data button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-11
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Calculating Data

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Calculating Data
c l
r a
When you save data, totals are calculated automatically for the parent members in the
dimension hierarchy. For example, if you enter and save data for the Hotel and Meals
O ly
members, a new total is calculated for their parent, Total Expenses.
NOTE
l & On
a e
The Entity dimension is an exception: Totals for parents are not calculated until

n
t e r
you run a data consolidation.

U s
I n
The administrator can create additional calculation rules that are not based on a parent-

l e
child relationship. For example, a rule might calculate the value for the Sales account by
multiplying the Units Sold account by the Price Per Unit account. You must use the
c
r a
Calculate feature to calculate values for such accounts because they are not
automatically calculated when data is saved.

O
5-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

To calculate data:
1. Open a data form.
2. Change the point of view dimensions as necessary.
3. Select the cell whose value you want to calculate data and save.
4. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Calculate button to calculate the cells that have changed.
• Click the Force Calculate button to force calculation to run for each Scenario,
Year, Period, Value, and Entity dimension defined in the grid, regardless of status.

NOTE
You must submit the data before calculating it.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-13
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Adding Cell Text and Documents

By default, Cell Text can hold up to

approximately 8000 characters.

Document attachments can be any

element in the database. If you want
to add Microsoft Office documents,
you must first add them to the Custom
documents area.
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Adding Cell Text and Documents
c l
a
You use the Cell Text feature to add text annotations to the cells in a data form.
r
O ly
If you are assigned the Manage Custom Documents security role, you can also attach
any type of public document stored in your workspace, such as a Word document, an

l & On
Excel spreadsheet, or an XML file. You should not attach more than three documents to

effect on the database.

n a e
a cell, and each document should be less than 100K in size to limit the performance

t e r U s
To add cell text:
I
1. Open a data form.n
c l e
2. Select the cell to which you want to add text.

r a
O
5-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

3. Perform one of the following actions:

• Right-click and select Cell Text.
• Click the Cell Text button .
• If the administrator has set up the form with a cell text column, enter the cell text in
the column.
4. Enter the cell text.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add cell text to additional cells.
7. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data toolbar button to save the data.
• Click the Refresh Data toolbar button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.

To attach documents to cells:

1. Select the input cell to which you want to attach a document.
m y
2. Right-click and select Cell Text, or click the Cell Text button .
d e
3. Click Attach.
c a
A
4. From the list of custom documents, select one or more documents to associate with
e
the cell and click Attach.

c l
NOTE

r a
You cannot add documents that you have made private. To add a custom
O ly
document, such as a Word or Excel document, you must first add that

& On
document to the Custom Documents area.

l
n a e
5. Click OK.

t e r U s
6. Perform one of the following actions:

I n
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-15
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

• Click the Refresh Data button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.
TIP
To detach a document from a cell, select the document to detach and then
click Detach.

To view cell text:

1. Select the input cell whose cell text you want to view.
TIP
A blue border around a cell indicates the cell has cell text attached to it.

2. Right-click and select Cell Text, or click the Cell Text button .

3. View the cell text.

4. Click Cancel.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to view additional cell text.
m y
d e
To view cell text attachments:
c a
A
1. Select the input cell for which you want to view the cell text attachment.

e
TIP

c l
A blue border around a cell indicates the cell has cell text attached to it.

r a
O ly
2. Right-click and select Cell Text, or click the Cell Text button .

l & On
3. Select the document attachment that you want to view and then follow the Microsoft
download instructions.

n a e
box.
t e r U s
4. When you have finished viewing the attachment, click Cancel in the Cell Text dialog

I n
c l e
r a
O
5-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Adding and Editing Line-Item Detail

The POV bar is static and cannot be changed in the Line Item Detail window.

Return to the Web form.

Additional menu items are available
in Web forms that are set up to
accept multiple periods of data.
m y
Clear changes without saving. Create additional line items.
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Adding and Editing Line-Item Detail
c l
r a
You can add as many rows of detail as you need. For example, you can add line-item
detail for gas, tolls, and parking to the Auto Expense account. After refreshing or saving
O ly
the form data, the cell displays the total of rows that contain line-item detail.

l & On
The maximum length for the description is 80 characters. You cannot change existing
detail descriptions.

n a e
NOTE

t e r U s
Cells that contain line-item detail are indicated by a red triangle in the top-left
corner.
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-17
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

To add line-item detail in a data form:

1. Open a data form.
2. Select the cell to which you want to add detail.
3. Right-click and select Cell Line Item Detail.
4. Enter the line-item detail for the cell and then click OK.
5. To add a row, click Add.
NOTE
If the form was set up for multiple period line-item detail, you can click Delete
Row to delete a row of line-item detail. You can also click Clear Row to clear
the line-item detail from a row.

6. To refresh the data, click Refresh.

TIP
This is also a good way to clear any changes that you do not want to save.

m y
e
7. When you have finished entering the line-item details, click the Close toolbar button.
d
8. To refresh the data in the form, click the Refresh button .
c a
To view line-item detail in a data form:
e A
1. Open a data form.
c l
r a
2. Select the cell whose line-item detail you want to view.

O ly
3. Right-click and select Cell Line Item Detail.

l & On
4. View the cell’s line-item detail.
5. Click the Close button.
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Accessing Linked Forms

Linked cells are

identified by their red
color in a Web form.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Accessing Linked Forms
c l
r a
When administrators create data forms, they can define links from one form to another
so that you can drill down to a detailed view. For example, a form that contains summary
O ly
account balances can be linked to a corresponding form to provide the necessary details
for the summary account.

l & On
NOTE

n a e
t e r
Only the initial form contains navigation links. The form that you link to does not
contain navigation links.
U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-19
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

To access linked forms:

1. In a data form, select a row that contains linked forms.
2. Right-click and select Linked Form.
A new form is displayed in a separate browser window.
3. Click the Close button .
If you do not have security rights to a form, or if it was deleted, an error message is
displayed.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Adding Members to Data Forms

Select the members to add to the form.

Click Add
Members.

y
Enter data. Any members for which you
do not add data are removed when you
submit the data to the database.
m
3

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Adding Members to Data Forms
c l
r a
When administrators define data forms, they can allow users to insert additional lines of
data. The new entries are inserted into the form, and the totals are updated. For
O ly
example, suppose that a form was defined for an account with intercompany

save data for those members.

l & On
transactions for IC1, IC2, and IC4. You can select members IC3 and IC5, and enter and

n a e
The form is refreshed with the saved data, and the new lines are displayed in the

e r
appropriate hierarchical order.
t U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-21
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

To add members to data forms:

1. In a data form, select a row that contains the Add Member button in the left
header cell.
2. Select the members for which you want to enter data, and click OK.
TIP
To select multiple members, press the Ctrl key as you select members.

3. Enter data for the members.

4. Click Save.
5. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click the Submit Data button to save the data.
• Click the Refresh Data button to refresh the database without saving the
changes.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Suppressing Data
Suppress No Columns

Suppress Invalid Rows Suppress Invalid Lines

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Suppressing Data
c l
r a
You can set row and column suppression options individually, under Suppress Rows and
Suppress Columns, or together, under Suppress Lines. For example, setting Suppress
O ly
Lines to NoData has the same effect as setting both Suppress Rows and Suppress
Columns to NoData.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-23
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

When the current row and column suppression options are different, the option selected
is displayed with an asterisk that indicates the current setting. For example, if NoData is
suppressed on rows and Zero is suppressed on columns, then Suppress Lines places
the asterisk on NoData & Zero. Clicking NoData & Zero sets both row and column
suppression to NoData & Zero.

NOTE
Only users with the security rights to manage forms see the invalid cells
suppression option. Suppression of invalid cells is automatically enabled for all
other users.

To suppress data:
1. Open a data form.
2. Perform one or more of the following actions:
• Suppress rows: Click the Suppress Rows button and select an option.
• Suppress columns: Click the Suppress Columns button and select an option.
• Suppress rows and columns: Click the Suppress Lines button and select an option.
m y
TIP
d e
c a
Another method of selecting suppression options is to place the cursor over a
row or column header, then right-click to change the row or column. To
A
change both row and column options, place the cursor in the space at the top

e
and select an option.
c l
left area of the form where the rows and columns intersect, then right-click

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Exporting to Excel

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Exporting to Excel
c l
r a
You can export data forms to Excel and import forms from Excel to Financial
Management. For example, you can export a form to Excel, use Excel to enter or edit
O ly
data, and reload the form into Financial Management.

TIP
l & On
a e
Exporting to Excel also enables you to run calculations on data that you cannot
n
t e r U s
perform in the data form, such as calculating variances.

I n
To export data forms to Excel:

l e
1. Open a data form.
c
O ra
2. Click the Export to Excel button .

Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-25

 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

3. In the File Download window, click Save, enter a file name, and click Save.
4. In the Download Complete window, click Close.
5. Navigate to the saved file and open it.
6. In Excel, enter or edit data in the input cells.
7. Perform one of the following actions:
• Select File > Save to save the file with the same name.
• Select File > Save As to save the file with a different name.

NOTE
When you save the file, the file name is displayed in quotation marks with a Web
page file extension (*.htm, *.html). If you change the file type, you will not be able
to reload the file into Financial Management.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Importing from Excel

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Importing from Excel
c l
r a
You can import data to a form by using Excel. For example, suppose that you exported
an Aging form to Excel and adjusted the data. After saving the Excel document, you can
O ly
import it into Financial Management.

NOTE
l & On
a e
You can import only Excel spreadsheets that were previously exported from
n
t e r
Financial Management.

U s
I n
To import data forms from Excel:

l e
1. Open a data form.
c
r a
2. Click the Import from Excel button.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-27
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

3. Click Browse to locate the file that you want to import, and click Open.
4. Click OK.
The information is automatically saved to the database, and the
data form is refreshed to the default point of view set by the
administrator. You must reset the point of view to see the loaded
data.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe data forms

• Enter data into data forms
• Calculate data in data forms
• Add cell text, documents, and line-item detail to data forms
• Access linked forms from data forms
• Add members to forms
• Suppress data in forms
• Export to and import from spreadsheets

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 5-29
 Module 2 Entering and Calculating Data
Lesson 5 Entering Data in Data Forms

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-30 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 3

Managing Journals 5

Overview
In this module you learn how to adjust data using journals.
Lessons in this unit include:
• Adjusting Data with Journals
• Processing and Reporting Journals

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 6

Adjusting Data with Journals 6

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe the purpose of journals
• Open periods for journal entry
• Create journal templates
• Create journals

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Journals Overview

Why use journals rather than data grids or data forms?

You can perform these tasks:
ƒ Create recurring journals that repeat for a number of future periods
ƒ Create auto-reversing journals that generate an automatic reversing
entry in the following time period
ƒ Use the approval process for journals to provide accountability

Adjusted
Account Journal
Account
Balance Adjustments
Balance

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Journals Overview
c l
r a
During a financial period, you may need to adjust data after it is entered or loaded into
base-level entities. In Financial Management, you use journals to make adjustments to
data.
O ly
l & On
Based on your security access, journals provide the following features:

a e
• You can create double-sided journal entries by using debits and credits.
n
e r s
• You can balance entries, or you can permit single-sided, out-of-balance entries.
t U
I n
You can use journals to record various types of adjustments such as reclasses, entry
corrections, reversals, accruals, minority interest accounting entries, elimination

l e
adjusting entries, and allocations.

c
r a
O
6-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

m y
d e
c a
e A
Data Adjustments with Audit Trails
c l
r a
Financial Management journals provide an audit trail of the changes made in an
application. Journals enable you to track which users made adjustments and which

O ly
accounts, entities, and time periods were affected. All adjustments made using journals

& On
must be reviewed and approved before they can be posted.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-3
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Journal Security

The following security roles relate to journals:

ƒ Journals Administrator (unrestricted journal access)
ƒ Manage Templates
ƒ Create Journals
ƒ Create Unbalanced Journals
ƒ Generate Recurring
ƒ Read Journals
ƒ Approve Journals
ƒ Post Journals

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Journal Security
c l
r a
You use security roles to define access rights for Financial Management tasks. The tasks
that you can perform in Set Up Journals, Journal Templates, and Process Journals

O ly
depend on the role assigned to you by the administrator. If a journal option is not

l & On
available to you, either the option is disabled, or it appears with a message alerting you
that you do not have the rights to perform the action.

n a e
To open a journal, you must have Read access to one or more of the cells referenced in

t e r U
NOACCESS status for these cells.s
the line items. If you do not have Read access to the cells, journal reports display a

I n
You must have All access to the security class for a journal to edit the journal. To post a

l e
journal, you must have All access to the security classes of every dimension in the detail

c
lines that use security classes.

r a
O
6-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Journals and the Value Dimension

<Entity Currency> 500 Value entered in data entry form

<Entity Currency Adjs> -75 Value posted from journal
<Entity Currency Total> 425 Adjusted value rolled up to parent

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Journals and the Value Dimension
c l
r a
The Value dimension plays an important role in journal processing. When you load data
from a file or use a data entry form or grid to enter data, the values are stored in the

O ly
Entity Currency member of the Value dimension. When you post adjustments from a

& On
journal, the adjustment values are stored in the Entity Currency Adjs member.

l
n a e
Financial Management stores the posted adjusted data by combining the values in the
Entity Currency and Entity Currency Adjs members and storing the result in the Entity

process.
t e r U s
Currency Total member. The posted adjusted value is used during the consolidation

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-5
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Multiple Journal Postings

Postings from multiple journals are cumulative.

Journal A:
<Entity Currency> 500 -100
<Entity Currency Adjs> -75
<Entity Currency Total> 425 Journal B:
+25

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Multiple Journal Postings
c l
r a
If more than one journal posts to the Entity Currency Adjs member for the same account,
the results are cumulative. The total from the current journal is added to or subtracted

O ly
from the existing total in Entity Currency Adjs.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Parent Adjustments

You can make a parent adjustment to WestSales

that affects only SalesServices or only California.

You select
which parent
is affected by
adjustments
posted to
Parent Adjs.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Parent Adjustments
c l
r a
If you have entities that roll up to more than one parent, you can create parent
adjustments, which enable you to apply an adjustment for a child to a selected parent,

O ly
rather than to all parents. To make a parent adjustment, you select the Parent Adjs

& On
member in the Value dimension for the journal POV.

l
NOTE

n a e
You can create parent adjustments only for parent entities for which the

t e r U s
administrator enabled the AllowAdjFromChildren application setting.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-7
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Opening and Closing Periods for Journal Entries
c
r a
For each scenario, the administrator must open time periods before you can post journal
entries. All periods in Financial Management have an initial status of Unopened.
O ly
To open a period:
l & On
a e
1. Expand Tasks > Journal Tasks > Manage Periods.
n
t e r U s
2. From the drop-down lists, select the scenario and year.

4. Click Open. I n
3. Check the period check box for the month to open.

c l e
r a
O
6-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

To close a period:
1. Expand Tasks > Journal Tasks > Manage Periods.
1. From the drop-down lists, select the scenario and year.
2. Check the period check box for the month to close.
3. Click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-9
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Accessing Journals

Create a journal
group to help classify
and sort journals.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Accessing Journals
c l
r a
In Financial Management, you use the Process Journals task to create journals and to
enter information into them. You can enter journal information in a blank journal or in a
template.
O ly
& On
You can use the Manage Groups task to help classify journals by type, such as
l
a e
reclasses, allocations, and overhead.

n
NOTE

t e r U s
The administrator, or journals administrator, creates journal groups.

I n
c l e
r a
O
6-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Journal Balance Types

Balanced Unbalanced Balanced by Entity

Entity

Debit Credit
Debit Credit Debit Credit
500 500
500 500 500 300
Entity

Debit Credit

400 400

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Journal Balance Types
c l
r a
When creating journals or journal templates, you specify whether the journals created
from the template are balanced, unbalanced, or balanced by entity.

O ly
Type
Balanced
Description

l & On
Total debits and total credits must be balanced before you can post the
journal.

n a e
Unbalanced

t e r U s
Total debits and credits do not have to be balanced before you can post
the journal.
Balanced by Entity
I n Total debits and credits for each entity must be balanced before you can
post the journal.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-11
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Creating Journal Templates

Journal Template

POV Entity *
* For single-entity journals

Description Reclass balances

Set up in advance
Accounts Interest Expense

C1..C4

Amounts Debit Credit

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Creating Journal Templates
c l
r a
You can create journal templates for posting adjustments that have common information.
For example, you can create a template that contains commonly used entities or
O ly
accounts. You can then use this template to create journals with similar information. In

templates.
l & On
Financial Management, you use the Manage Journal Templates task to create journal

n a e
You can create two types of journal templates:

Template
t e r
Description
U s
Standard
I n
Contain accounts and entities for adjustments that you enter frequently

c l
Recurring
e Contain complete information for identical journal entities that occur for more
than one period

r a
O
6-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Journal templates are independent of scenario and year. You select the scenario and the
year when you create a journal based on a template. However, for recurring templates,
you must select a Value dimension member.

To create a standard journal template:

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select Journal Tasks.
2. Select Manage Journal Templates.
3. On the Standard tab, click New.
4. Enter a label for the template.
The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. Do not
include spaces in the label. The following characters are not
allowed: . + - * / # { } ; , @ ".
5. From the Group drop-down list, select a group to assign to the journal.
The journal group that you assign must exist in the application.

Balanced by Entity.
m y
6. From the Balance Type drop-down list, select a balance type: Balanced, Unbalanced, or

7. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class.

d e
8. Enter a description for the journal template.
c a
A
9. For each dimension, select members by performing one of the following actions:

e
• Enter a member name.
c l
• Click Pick Members.
r a
TIP
O ly
You can also double-click the dimension to open the Pick Members dialog

l & On
box, or right-click and select Pick Members. When you select an account,

a e
only the valid ICP or Custom members for that account are displayed.

n
t e r U s
10. Perform one of the following actions:

I n
• Add rows to the template: Click Add Rows.

l e
• Save the template: Click Save.
c
r a
• Restore the last saved version of the template: Click Reset.

O • Preview and print the template: Click Print.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-13

 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

To create a recurring template:

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select Journal Tasks.
2. Select Manage Journal Templates.
3. On the Recurring tab, click New.
4. Enter a label for the template.
The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. Do not
include spaces in the label. The following characters are not
allowed: . + - * / # { } ; , @ ".
5. From the Group drop-down list, select a group to assign to the journal.
The journal group that you assign must exist in the application.
6. From the Balance Type drop-down list, select a balance type: Balanced, Unbalanced, or
Balanced by Entity.
7. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class.
8. Select a Value dimension for the journal.
You must select a value for a recurring template because this
m y
template recurs automatically. You will not have an opportunity to
choose a value, as you would in a standard template.
d e
9. Enter a description for the journal template.
c a
A
10. For each dimension, enter a member name, or click Pick Members to select
e
members.
c l
TIP
r a
You can also double-click the dimension to open the Pick Members dialog
O ly
box, or right-click and select Pick Members. When you select an account,

& On
only the valid ICP or Custom members for that account are displayed.

l
n a e
t e r U s
11. In the Debit or Credit column, enter an adjustment.
12. Perform one of the following actions:

I n
• Add rows to the template: Click Add Rows.

l e
• Save the template: Click Save.
c
r a
• Restore the last saved version of the template: Click Reset.

O13. Preview and print the template: Click Print.

6-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Editing Journal Templates

You can edit a journal template, for example, you can change the description or balance
type, or you can add rows to add adjustments.

To edit a journal template:

1. From the list of templates, select the template that you want to edit.
2. Edit the template information.
3. Optional: Click Add Rows to add rows for more entries.
4. Click Save to save the changes.

Deleting Journal Templates

You can delete journal templates that you no longer need. For example, if you have a
journal template for adjustments to an account, and that account is removed from your
chart of accounts, you can delete the template for those adjustments.

To delete a journal template:

m y
to delete, and click Delete.
d e
1. From the list of templates, select the check box next to each template that you want

2. Click OK.
c a
TIP

e A
l
You can also delete a template within the template.
c
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-15
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Filtering Journal Template Lists

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Filtering Journal Template Lists
c l
r a
You can filter the list of journal templates to be displayed in the list of templates, so that
you can find templates easily based on selected criteria. You can filter the list by entity,

O ly
label, group, and description. You can enter text filters, including the percent (%) symbol

& On
as a wildcard, or you can leave a text box blank to avoid filtering on the text.

l
NOTE

n a e
r s
Depending on your database setup, text boxes for journal filters may be case-

e
sensitive. For example, filtering with "testgroup" may return results that are
t U
different from those obtained by filtering with "TestGroup."

I n
c l e
r a
O
6-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

To filter the template list:

1. On the Journal Templates page, select the Standard tab or the Recurring tab.
2. Click Filter, and select the Filter tab.
3. Perform an action:
• Filter by entity: Enter an entity name, or click the Browse button and select an
entity from the Member Selection dialog box.
• Filter by label, group, or description: Enter text, or use the % symbol as a wildcard.
4. Click OK.
5. Optional: To restore the list to its unfiltered default status, click Restore Defaults.

To select columns to be displayed in the template list:

1. On the Journal Templates page, select the Standard tab or the Recurring tab.
2. Click Filter, and select the Columns tab.
3. From the Displayed Columns drop-down lists, select the columns to be displayed.

m y
change its sort order.
d e
4. From the Sort drop-down list next to a column, select Ascending or Descending to

5. Click OK.
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-17
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Setting the Point of View

Set the point of view before you create a journal.

Create
a journal

List of journals for the current point of view

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Setting the Point of View
c l
Before creating a journal, you must set the POV based on your requirements. The POV

r a
displays the members for the Scenario, Year, Period, and Value dimensions. You can

O ly
change the members for these dimensions by clicking the appropriate links.
NOTE

l & On
You can create journals for parent adjustments by selecting the Parent Adjs
a e
member for the Value dimension.
n
t e r U s
n
To set the POV on the Process Journals page:
I
c l e
1. From the POV, select a member for the scenario, year, period, and value dimensions.
2. Click OK.

r a
O
6-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Filtering Journal Lists

Before

New option chosen

After

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Filtering Journal Lists
c l
r a
You can filter the list of journals and the information that you want to view about the
journals. You can then easily find journals based on specific criteria. You can filter the list

O ly
by entity, label, group, and description.

l & On
To select journal columns to be displayed in the list:

n a e
1. On the Process Journals page, click Filter, and select the Columns tab.

t e r U s
2. From the Displayed Columns drop-down lists, select the columns to be displayed.

I n
3. From the Sort drop-down list next to a column, select Ascending or Descending to

c l e
change its sort order.
4. Click OK.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-19
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

To filter the journal list:

1. On the Process Journals page, click Filter.
2. Perform an action:
• Filter by entity: Enter an entity name, or click the Browse button and select an entity
from the Member Selection dialog box.
• Filter by label, group, or description: Enter text, or use the % symbol as a wildcard.
• Filter by status, type, or balance type: Select the check box next to the option.
3. Click OK.
4. Optional: To restore the list to its unfiltered default status, click Restore Defaults.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Creating Journals

Blank journal Journal template

Description Description Reclass balances

Accounts Accounts Interest Expense

C1..C4
Blank journal Blank journal

Amounts Descript ion Amounts Debit

Description Credit

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Creating Journals
c l
r a
After setting the POV, click the New button to view the New Journal page, on which you
choose either to start with a blank journal or to create the journal from a template.
O ly
• If you select Create as Single Entity Journal, Entity is added to the journal POV bar

l & On
and you can select a single entity for the journal.

a e
• If you clear Create as Single Entity Journal, you can select multiple entities in the
n
journal rows.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-21
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Entering Journal Data

Select a balance type.

Select members for each row.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Entering Journal Data
c l
a
After creating a journal, you perform the following tasks to enter journal data.
r
O ly
For single-entity journals, select the entity from the POV bar.

& On
• Enter a label and a description.

l
a e
• Optional: Select the balance type and assign a security class.

n
t e r s
• For each row, select an account and a member for each of the other dimensions. For
multiple-entity journals, you also select the entity for each row.
U
I n
After entering the journal data, you can scan the journal to verify that all entries are valid.

l e
When you run a scan, if the journal contains errors, a separate window displays the scan
results by row number.
c
r a
O
6-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

To create a regular journal:

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select Journal Tasks.
2. Select Process Journals and set the journal POV.
3. Click New.
4. For the type of journal, select Regular.
5. Perform one of the following actions:
• To create a journal from a template: Click Create from a template, select the template
from the list, and click OK.
• If you are not creating a journal from a template: Select Start with Blank Journal, and
click OK.
• To create a journal for a single entity: Select Create as Single Entity Journal, and click
OK.

NOTE
When you create a single-entity journal, the corresponding currency is

m y
displayed in the top right of the detail window for the entity being adjusted.

the currency of the parent is displayed.

d e
Depending on the type of adjustment, either the currency of the entity or

c a
6. Enter a label for the journal.

e A
c l
The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. The following
characters are not allowed: . + - * / # { } ; , @ "

r a
7. From the Group drop-down list, select a group to assign to the journal.

O ly
The journal group that you assign must exist in the application.

l & On
8. From the Balance Type drop-down list, select a balance type: Balanced, Unbalanced, or
Balanced by Entity.

n a e
t e r U s
9. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class.
10. Enter a description for the journal.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-23
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

11. For each dimension, enter a member name, or click Pick Members to select members.
TIP
You can also double-click the dimension to open the Pick Members dialog
box, or right-click and select Pick Members. When you select an account,
only the valid ICP or Custom members for that account are displayed.

12. Enter an adjustment in the Debit or Credit column.

13. Perform one of the following actions:
• Add rows to the journal: Click Add Rows.
• Save the journal: Click Save.
• Restore the last saved version of the journal: Click Reset.
14. Click Close to return to the journal list.

To edit a journal:
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.
m y
e
2. From the list of journals, select a journal with a status of Working, Submitted, or
d
Rejected.
3. Change the dimension members or edit the line items.
c a
e A
4. Click Scan to scan the detail lines and ensure that the lines are valid.
5. Perform an action:
c l
• Click Save to save your changes
r a
O ly
• Click Reset to restore the last saved version of the journal.

l & On
6. Click Close to return to the journal list.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Creating Auto-Reversing Journals

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Creating Auto-Reversing Journals
c l
r a
You create auto-reversing journals to enter adjustments that you want to reverse in the
next period, such as sales or expenses that are collected and paid in the next period.

O ly
Auto-reversing journals affect two periods of data. You post an auto-reversing journal to

l & On
adjust values in one period. When you post it, the system automatically creates a journal
that reverses those adjustments for the next period. The journal created in the following

a e
period has the Approved status. You can then post this approved journal for the reversal
n
to take effect.

t e r U s
For example, you can create and post an auto-reversing journal in January that adjusts

I n
the Sales accounts for EastSales. The system creates a journal that reverses those
adjustments for February.

c l e
The status of the auto-reversing journal is Approved. You post this approved journal for

r a
the reversal to take effect. When you unpost an auto-reversal journal, the status of the
journal changes back to Approved.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-25
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

You can edit, reject, post, or unpost an auto-reversing journal. When you unpost an auto-
reversing journal, the system-generated auto-reversing journal in the next period is
deleted. You cannot unpost an auto-reversing journal after its auto-reversal is posted. If
necessary, you can reject, edit, unpost, or delete the auto-reversing journal.

To create an auto-reversing journal:

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select Journal Tasks.
2. Select Process Journals, and set the journal POV.
3. Click New.
4. For the type of journal, select Auto-reversing.
5. Perform one of the following actions:
• To create a journal from a template: Click Create from a template, select the template
from the list, and click OK.
• If you are not creating a journal from a template: Select Start with Blank Journal, and
click OK.

m
• To create a journal for a single entity: Select Create as Single Entity Journal, and
y
click OK.
d e
NOTE
c a
A
When you create a single-entity journal, the corresponding currency is
displayed in the top right of the detail window for the entity being adjusted.
e
c l
Depending on the type of adjustment, either the currency of the entity or
the currency of the parent is displayed.

r a
6. Enter a label for the journal.
O ly
l & On
The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. The following

a e
characters are not allowed: . + - * / # { } ; , @ "

n
t e r U s
7. From the Group drop-down list, select a group to assign to the journal.
The journal group that you assign must exist in the application.

I n
8. From the Balance Type drop-down list, select a balance type: Balanced, Unbalanced, or

l e
Balanced by Entity.

c
9. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class.

r a
10. Enter a description for the journal.
O
6-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

11. For each dimension, enter a member name, or click Pick Members to select members.
TIP
You can also double-click the dimension to open the Pick Members dialog
box, or right-click and select Pick Members. When you select an account,
only the valid ICP or Custom members for that account are displayed.

12. Enter an adjustment in the Debit or Credit column.

13. Perform one of the following actions:
• Add rows to the journal: Click Add Rows.
• Save the journal: Click Save.
• Restore the last saved version of the journal: Click Reset.
14. Click Close to return to the journal list.

Creating Journals by Using Recurring Templates

You can use a recurring template to create journals automatically. When you generate a
m y
was generated. The status of the journal is Approved.
d e
journal from a recurring template, you receive a confirmation message that the journal

c a
To create a journal by using a recurring template, you must be assigned the Generate

the template.
e A
Recurring security role. You must also have All access to the security class assigned to

c l
The system uses the security class assigned to the template as the security class for the

r a
journal. If you need to modify the security class assignment for the journal, you must
reject the journal and resubmit it. To edit a journal, you must have All access to the
O ly
security class assigned to the journal. To modify the template, you must have All access

& On
to the security class assigned to the template.

l
n a e
To create a journal by using a recurring template:

e r s
1. On the Journal Templates page, select the Recurring Templates tab.
t U
I n
2. Select a template from which to create a journal, and click Open.

c l e
3. Click Generate.
4. Select a scenario, year, and period for which you want to generate the journal, and

r aclick OK.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-27
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Scanning Journals

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Scanning Journals
c l
r a
When you enter journal adjustments, you can scan the detail lines to make sure that they
are valid, so that you can make necessary changes before you post the journal.

O ly
When you run a scan, if the journal contains errors, a separate window displays the scan
& On
results by row number. If all entries are valid, no message is displayed.
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

To scan a journal:
1. Create a journal or open an existing journal.
2. Click Scan.

TIP
If you are scanning a new journal, be sure to save it before performing the
scan.

3. If the journal contains errors, review the results, and click Back to Journal.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 6-29
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 6 Adjusting Data with Journals

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe the purpose of journals

• Open periods for journal entry
• Create journal templates
• Create journals

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-30 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 7

Processing and Reporting Journals 7

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe the journal review process
• Submit, approve, post, and delete journals
• View adjusted data in data grids
• View adjustments in the Entity Details report
• Create, preview, and save journal reports

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Journal Review Process Overview

Senior Accountant Accounting Manager

or Financial Analyst or Controller

Create journal

Submit journal
Review and approve journal
for approval

Receive approval

* Post journal

* Can be assigned to another role

m y
or individual

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Journal Review Process Overview
c l
r a
After creating a journal, you must submit it to your supervisor for approval. After your
supervisor approves the journal, you can post it to the Financial Management database.
O ly
When you submit, approve, or post journals, the system validates them by performing
the following checks:
l & On
a e
• The period must be a base period for the base frequency of the scenario.
n
e r s
• When you post or unpost a journal, the period must be opened.
t U
n
• The Value dimension member must be an adjustment member.
I
c l e
• The journal must have the appropriate status for the action to be performed.

r a
O
7-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

• Line items must exist for the journal. The entity and the parent must be valid
members. For regular journals, the entity must allow adjustments. If you are posting
a journal to a Parent Currency Adjs Value dimension member, you must enter a valid
parent, and the entity must be a child of the specified parent for the journal entity.
• If you are posting a journal to a node, the parent must allow adjustments for child
entities. The entity must be a child of the specified parent.
• The account must be a valid account: Asset, Liability, Income, Expense, Balance,
Flow, or Balance Recurring. The account must be a base account and cannot be
calculated (that is, the account should not be designated as calculated in metadata).
It cannot be calculated through a rollup (that is, the account cannot have children).
• All other dimensions must be valid dimensions. The Intercompany Partner (ICP)
dimension cannot be ICP Top, ICP Entities, or left blank; however, you can select
[ICP None]. If an ICP is specified, the account must be set up as an ICP account.
• The custom dimensions cannot be designated as calculated in metadata and cannot
be calculated through a rollup (that is, the custom dimensions cannot have children).
• For a balanced journal, the total debits must equal the total credits. For a balanced by

m
balanced by entity node journal, the total debits must equal the total credits for each
y
entity regular journal, the total debits must equal the total credits for each entity. For a

d e
node, and the parent and children entities must have the same currency. If the Value

c a
dimension member is Entity Currency, the parent entities in the journal can have
different currencies, but they must have the same currency as their children entities.
• All intersections must be valid.
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-3
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

m y
d e
c a
e A
Initiating the Journal Review Process
c l
r a
1. Users review and submit journals. The journals are submitted for approval by
selecting the Submit option in the Process drop-down menu on the Process Journals
O ly
page. Users can submit journals one at a time or in batches.

l & On
2. The status of the journal changes from Working to Submitted.

a e
3. A reviewer (a user with the Journal Approver security role) approves or rejects the
n
t e r U s
journal by selecting the Approve or Reject option in the Process drop-down menu.
4. Users can post the journal by selecting the Post option in the Process drop-down

I n
menu. Journals are normally posted after their status is changed to Approved.

l e
It is important to note that, if you have the Post Journals security role and the period is

c
opened, you can post a journal with a Submitted, Working, or Rejected status.

r a
O
7-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

You can also unpost a posted journal. Unposting a posted journal creates reversing
entries for the journal in the database and changes the status of the journal to Rejected.
NOTE
At any time, you can process journals by selecting them from the list of journals on
the Process Journals page. You can also use this method to process multiple
journals at the same time.

To submit a journal:
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each working or
rejected journal that you want to submit.
3. From the Process drop-down list, select Submit.

TIP
You can also select Submit from the Process drop-down list from within a
journal.

m y
To unsubmit a journal: d e
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.
c a
A
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each submitted journal
e
that you want to unsubmit.
c l
a
3. From the Process drop-down list, select Unsubmit.
r
TIP
O ly
journal.
l & On
You can also select Unsubmit from the Process drop-down list from within a

n a e
To approve a journal:
t e r U s
I n
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.

l e
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each submitted journal

c
that you want to approve.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-5
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

3. From the Process drop-down list, select Approve.

TIP
You can also select Approve from the Process drop-down list from within a
journal.

To reject a journal:
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each submitted journal
that you want to reject.
3. From the Process drop-down list, select Reject.

TIP
You can also select Reject from the Process drop-down list from within a
journal.

To reject an approved journal:

m y
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.
d e
c a
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each approved journal
that you want to reject.

e A
l
3. From the Process drop-down list, select Reject.

c
TIP
r a
You can also select Reject from the Process drop-down list from within a
journal.
O ly
l & On
To post a journal:
n a e
t e r U s
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.

want to post.
I n
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each journal that you

c l eNOTE

Ora You cannot post previously posted journals.

7-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

3. From the Process drop-down list, select Post.

TIP
You can also select Post from the Process drop-down list within a journal.

To unpost a journal:
1. On the Process Journals page, set the journal POV.
2. In the list of journals, select the check box next to the label of each posted journal
that you want to unpost.
3. From the Process drop-down list, select Unpost.
TIP
You can also select Unpost from the Process drop-down list from within a
journal.

To delete a journal:
m y
delete.
d e
1. In the list of journals, select the check box next to each journal that you want to

2. Click Delete.
c a
3. Click OK to delete the selected journal.

e A
TIP
c l
a
You can also delete a journal if the journal is open.
r
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-7
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Viewing Adjusted Data in Data Grids

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Viewing Adjusted Data in Data Grids
c l
r a
You can view the adjustments made to the accounts for an entity by using a data grid.
You can change the Value dimension in the grid POV to view the values in the Entity
O ly
Currency Adjs, Entity Currency, and Entity Currency Total members.

l & On
When you select the Entity Currency Adjs member, accounts whose adjustments are

n a e
posted from several journals display cumulative values. You can view the adjustment
detail for these accounts by right-clicking a cell and selecting Cell Adjustments.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Viewing Adjustments in the Entity Details Report

Journal Adjustments

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
l
Viewing Adjustments in the Entity Details Report
c
r a
You can use the Entity Details report to view details of the entire consolidation path for a
specific cell, including the journal entries generated in the journal posting process.
O ly
& On
To generate the Entity Details report:
l
a e
1. Right-click a valid intersection.
n
2. Select Entity Details.

t e r U s
NOTE

I n
In an entity report for a Parent entity, the data shows only the totals from its

l e
children.

c
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-9
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Creating Journal Reports

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Creating Journal Reports
c l
adjustments. r a
You can run journal reports to check the status of journals and to review journal

O ly
To create journal reports:
l & On
a e
• You create a journal report by clicking the Reports button on the Process Journals
n
page.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Setting Journal Report Properties

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Setting Journal Report Properties
c l
for the report.
r a
You can set properties for a journal report to set the report description and point of view

O ly
& On
NOTE

l
The label section is optional. If the label is not printed on the final report, only the

a e
description and POV sections are visible on the final report.

r n s
To set properties:
n t e U
I
1. Navigate to Tasks > Journal Tasks > Process Journals.
e
c l
2. Click the Reports button.

r a
3. Select the Properties tab.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-11
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Selecting Columns and Filters

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Selecting Columns and Filters
c l
r a
When setting up a journal report, you select the columns to be displayed on the report.
Next, you define filters to specify which journals to include in the report.

O ly
To select columns, you use the Columns tab. You can sort each column in either
& On
ascending or descending order. If a column is a dimension, you can display dimension
l
labels, descriptions, or both.

n a e
t e r s
You use the Filter tab to define the filters for the report. You can filter the report by entity,
label, group, description, status, type, or balance type. For example, you can filter a
U
I n
report to include only unposted journals. Only journals or journal templates that meet all
filter criteria are included in the report.

c l e
r a
O
7-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

To select columns to display in the report:

1. On the Process Journals page, select the journals to be displayed in the report.
2. Click Reports, and select the Columns tab.
3. From the Displayed Columns drop-down lists, select the columns to be displayed in
the report.
4. From the Displayed Columns drop-down lists, select the fields to be displayed in the
columns.
5. From the Sort drop-down list next to a column, select Ascending or Descending to sort
the columns.
6. From the Options drop-down list, select one of the following options:
• Display the dimension member label: Select Label.
• Display the dimension member description: Select Description.
• Display the dimension member label and description: Select Both.
7. Select one or more of the following options:
• Repeat the information in every row: Select the Repeat check box.
m y
• Display the subtotal for the amounts: Select the Totals check box.
d e
c
• Display the columns as their default settings: Click Restore Defaults. a
8. Click Close.
e A
c l
r a
To filter the list of journals for the report:
1. On the Process Journals page, select the journals to be displayed in the report.
O ly
l & On
2. Click Reports, and select the Filter tab.
3. Perform one or more of the following actions:

n a e
t e r
• Filter by entity: Enter an entity name, or click the Browse button and select an entity
s
from the Member Selection dialog box.
U
I n
• Filter by label, group, or description: Enter text, or use the % symbol as a wildcard.

c l e
• Filter by status: Select one or more of the following options: Working, Submitted,
Approved, Rejected, or Posted.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-13
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

• Filter by type: Select one or more of the following options: Auto-reversing, Regular, or
Auto-reversal.
• Filter by balance type: Select one of the following options: Balanced, Unbalanced, or
Balanced by Entity.
4. Click OK.
5. Optional: To restore the list to its unfiltered default status, click Restore Defaults.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Previewing Reports

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Previewing Reports
c l
r
your report with the selected options.a
After you specify report properties, columns, and filters; select Print/Preview, to display

O ly
To preview a report:
l & On
a e
1. Select the journal from the Process Journals page.

n
t e r
2. Click the Reports button.

U s
3. Click the Print/Preview button.

I n
The report displays in a new window.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-15
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Saving Journal Reports Remotely

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Saving Journal Reports Remotely
c l
r a
If you have the proper security rights, after specifying the layout for the journal report,
you can save the report on the Financial Management server.

O ly
To save a report on the ser ver:
l & On
a e
1. On the Reports page, open the report that you want to save.

n
2. Click Save Remote.

t e r U
3. Enter a name for the report.
s
I n
The report name can contain a maximum of 20 characters.

c l e
Quotation marks and the equal sign (=) are not allowed in report
names.

r a
4. Enter a report description.

O
7-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

5. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class for the report.
6. Select the Private check box to prevent other users from running the report.
7. Select the Overwrite an existing file check box to overwrite the existing file.
8. Click OK, and then click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-17
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Saving Journal Reports Locally

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Saving Journal Reports Locally
c l
r a
You can save reports that you use on a regular basis to your hard drive or to a network
drive. You can then open the reports on the Web and change the columns and filters as
needed.
O ly
To save a report locally:
l & On
n a e
1. On the Reports page, open the report that you want to save.
2. Click Save Local.
t e r U s
I n
3. Complete steps 1 through 6 from the Download Instructions dialog box.

c l e
r a
O
7-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Running Journal Reports

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Running Journal Reports
c l
default report options.
r a
When you run the report, you can select to override the report point of view and other

O ly
To run a journal report:
l & On
a e
1. Navigate from the Browser View > Documents > Reporting > Journal.

n
t e r U s
2. On the Process Journals page, select the journals to display in the report.
3. From the POV bar, select a scenario, year, period, and value for the report.
4. Click Reports. I n
c l e
5. On the Properties tab, enter a label and a description for the report.

r a
6. Select the columns and display options for the report.

O 7. Click Print/Preview.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 7-19

 Module 3 Managing Journals
Lesson 7 Processing and Reporting Journals

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe the journal review process

• Submit, approve and post journals
• View adjusted data in data grids
• View adjustments in the entity details report
• Create, preview and save journal reports

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 4

Managing Intercompany Data 7

Overview
This module covers how to manage intercompany data in a Financial
Management application.
Lessons in this unit include:
• Eliminating Intercompany Balances
• Managing Intercompany Transactions

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 8

Eliminating Intercompany Balances 8

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe how intercompany data is eliminated in Financial
Management
• Create intercompany reports
• Send e-mail alerts for intercompany reports

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

m y
d e
c a
e A
Intercompany Transactions Overview
c l
a
The example on the slide illustrates the following process:
r
O ly
1. The East Sales organization makes a sale to an outside customer.

l & On
2. The goods are shipped from an internal organization (West Factory). West Factory
sends an intercompany invoice to East Sales for the goods that West Factory
shipped.
n a e
e r s
Entities that conduct intercompany transactions are known as intercompany partners
(ICPs).
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Intercompany Account Balances

2 USA

California 1 Connecticut

Plant1 West
2 1 Administration 2 Marketing
Sales
East East

1 East Sales
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Intercompany Account Balances
c l
a
Intercompany transactions produce intercompany account balances.
r
O ly
To avoid overstatement, you must eliminate intercompany account balances before
external financial statements are generated. Balances are eliminated at the first common
& On
parent of the intercompany partners.
l
a e
For the example on the slide, intercompany balances in Administration East or East
n
t e r s
Sales are eliminated at the Connecticut entity. Intercompany balances between Plant1
and Marketing East are eliminated at the USA entity.
U
I n
During data consolidation, Financial Management automatically eliminates intercompany
balances.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-3
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Elimination Process

USA
RentalRevenue: 0
RentalExpense: 0

California Connecticut
RentalRevenue: 1500 RentalRevenue: 0
RentalExpense: 0 RentalExpense: 1500

Plant1 West Sales Administration Marketing

East East
RentalRevenue: 1500
RentalExpense: 0 East Sales
RentalRevenue: 0
RentalExpense: 1500
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Elimination Process
c l
r a
Elimination of intercompany balances occurs during data consolidation. During the
elimination process, differences between intercompany account balances are posted to
a plug account.
O ly
& On
For the example on the slide, East Sales leased equipment worth USD $1,500 from
l
n a e
Plant1. When data is consolidated, the intercompany account balances for the
RentalExpense and RentalRevenue intercompany accounts are eliminated at the first

t e r
common parent, the USA entity.

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Plug Accounts

Intercompany Accounts Non-Intercompany Account

Sales - Intercompany Purchases - Intercompany IntercoDiffPL

500 600 -100

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Plug Accounts
c l
r a
Because balances for intercompany partners may not agree, you need accounts that,
upon consolidation, record the differences between pairs of intercompany account

O ly
balances. In Financial Management, these storage accounts are referred to as plug
accounts.

l & On
n a e
The example on the slide shows a USD $500 Sales intercompany account balance
against a USD $600 Purchases intercompany account balance. When consolidation is

t
account (IntercoDiffPL).e r U s
performed, the USD $100 difference is placed in the intercompany difference plug

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-5
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Intercompany Eliminations
and the Value Dimension

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Intercompany Eliminations and the Value Dimension
c
r a
Intercompany eliminations are stored in the Value dimension. Because Value dimension
members are displayed in data grids and reports, you can easily audit intercompany
eliminations.
O ly
& On
For the Entity Currency members that are associated with intercompany balance
l
n a e
accounts, reversing entries are created in Elimination members. The reversals result in
zero balances being consolidated to the Entity Currency member associated with the

t e r U s
parent account. The differences between the eliminated balance are posted to the Entity
Currency member of the plug account.

I n
For the example on the slide, California.1000 and California.Plant1 have intercompany

l e
account balances in the SalesInterco and PurchasesInterco accounts. The Elimination

c
member provides reversing entries for the account balances.

r a
O
8-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Therefore, the Entity Currency members for the SalesInterco and PurchasesInterco
accounts for the parent California have zero balances. The balances eliminated from
SalesInterco and PurchasesInterco are posted to the IntercoDiffPL plug account.
California displays a balance of -100 for IntercoDiffPL, which is the difference between
the eliminations posted from the intercompany accounts.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-7
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Intercompany Partner Matching Reports

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Intercompany Partner Matching Reports
c l
r a
Intercompany matching reports help you track intercompany transactions for analysis
and auditing purposes. After consolidating the data, you can run intercompany matching

O ly
reports that provide detail on eliminated intercompany account balances.

& On
• You can create intercompany matching reports either by using the user interface or
l
a e
by using a text editor to specify report options in a script.

n
t e r U s
• You can edit a report by modifying the report script.
• You can select accounts for the report or use the plug account option. In the latter

I n
case, the system generates the account and matching account based on the plug
account.

c l e
• You can suppress reversed transactions, custom dimensions, or intercompany

r a
details.

O • When you print a report, you can override report settings to customize the report.

8-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Creating Intercompany Matching Reports

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Creating Intercompany Matching Reports
c l
r a
In Financial Management, you use the Reporting tab on the Documents page to create
intercompany matching reports. This page contains options to select the intercompany
O ly
entities and their partners as well as the intercompany accounts.

l & On
In addition to entering or selecting the account on the Accounts line and the Matching

n a e
Accounts line, you also enter all four custom dimensions. If you do not add the custom
dimensions, the report either takes several hours to be displayed or produces a timeout
error.
t e r U s
Example syntax:
I n
c l e
Accounts: A#ICARTrade.C1#name.C2#name.C3#name.C4#name
Matching Accounts: A#ICAPTrade.C1#name.C2#name.C3#name.C4#name

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-9
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

To create an ICP matching report:

1. Select Administration > Manage Documents.
2. Select the Reporting tab.
3. From the Report Type drop-down list, select Intercompany.
4. From the File Type drop-down list, select a file type.
5. Click New Report.
The New Intercompany Report page is displayed.
6. Enter a name and a description for the report.
7. From the drop-down list, select a security class for the report.
8. In the POV bar, select the dimensions.
TIP
You can also enter a parent in the Top Member area and press Enter to run a
report against all the entities in that list.

m y
9. In the Entity text box, perform an action:

d e
• Enter an entity label for the report.
• Click the Browse button to select an entity. c a
e
10. In the Partner text box, perform an action: A
c l
• Enter an intercompany matching partner to be displayed in the report.

r a
• Click the Browse button to select the intercompany matching partner.

O ly
11. Select one or more of the following report options:

l & On
• Suppress Matches—Suppress transactions if the entity and partner amounts are

a e
within the matching tolerance amount.
n
t e r U s
• Matching Tolerance—Enter a matching tolerance value to see only out-of-balance
transactions over a certain amount, or use the default value of 0.

I n
• Suppress Reversed—Suppress reversed transactions from partners for each

l e
corresponding entity transaction.

c
r a
• Suppress Details—Suppress intercompany details and print only the total difference
for each Entity/Partner section.

O
8-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

• Suppress Customs—Suppress custom dimensions.

• Scale Factor—Select a scale factor from the drop-down list, or use the default value
of 0. For example, if you select a scale factor of 3, the report amount is displayed in
thousands. If the scale factor is 0, the report amount is displayed in units.
• Decimal Override—Select a decimal setting from the drop-down list to override the
one defined in the account, or use the default value.
• Member Display—Display the member label, the description, or both.
• Plug Account Display—Enable the checkbox to display a summary of plug accounts
that are affected by the intercompany transaction.
• Group By—Group custom dimension transactions by the Custom1, Custom2,
Custom3, or Custom4 dimension.
12. In the Accounts section, click Add and select the accounts to be displayed in the report.
13. If you selected Plug Account Display in step 10, select These are Plug Accounts.

NOTE
If you select a plug account, all accounts that have this account as the plug
m
account are automatically included in the report. You do not need to select the
y
d e
matching accounts, because the system automatically generates the account
and matching accounts for the report based on the plug account.

c a
A
14. In the Matching Accounts section, click Add and select the matching accounts to be

e
displayed in the report.

c l
r a
15. Perform one or more of the following actions:
• Click Print/Preview to print or preview the report.
O ly
& On
• Click Save Local or Save Remote to save the report.

l
a e
16. Click Close to return to the report list.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-11
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Viewing ICP Report Scripts

Selecting a report link

shows the report script.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing ICP Report Scripts
c l
r a
A script is automatically created for each ICP report. You should become familiar with the
script because it contains information that you may want to override or edit later to

O ly
generate new reports for your entity.

To view an ICP report script:

l & On
n a e
1. In the Manage Documents area, select the Reporting tab.

t e r U s
2. In the Report Type area, select Intercompany.

I n
3. Select the report that you want to view, and click Print/Preview.

c l e
r a
O
8-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Printing ICP Reports and Overriding Settings

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Printing ICP Reports and Overriding Settings
c
r a
You can access the list of saved intercompany matching reports on the Reporting tab.
From this list, you select a report and click Print to run and print the report. You can also

O ly
select the check box next to any report to override the report settings.

NOTE
l & On
a e
You can override options for the current session only. These settings are not
n
Management.
t e r
saved and are not available the next time that you log on to Financial

U s
I n
c l e
To print ICP reports and override settings:
1. On the Reporting tab, select the check box next to the report that you want to print.

r a
2. Click Print.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-13
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

3. Perform one or more actions:

• Run the report with the current settings: Proceed to step 4.
• Override the Entity setting: Select the check box next to the Entity setting and enter
an entity label for the report.
• Override the Partner setting: Select the check box next to the Partner setting and
enter an intercompany matching partner to be displayed in the report.
• Override the existing values or settings: Select the appropriate check box.
4. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Editing and Saving Intercompany

Matching Reports Locally

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Editing and Saving Intercompany Matching Reports Locally
c
r a
You can edit an intercompany matching report that was created by the administrator and
then save it locally on your computer. Saving the report locally is helpful if you override

O ly
the administrator’s settings when you view a report.

l & On
To save an intercompany matching report locally:

n a e
1. On the Reporting tab, select the report for which you want to override settings and
save locally.
t e r U s
2. Click Edit.
I n
c l e
3. Change the settings.
4. Click Save Local.

r a The Download Instructions dialog box is displayed.

O 5. Save the report according to the displayed instructions.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-15

 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

To open an intercompany matching report stored locally:

1. Select Manage Documents.
2. Select Reporting.
3. From the Report drop-down list, select Intercompany.
4. Click Browse to browse for the file.
5. Perform one of the following actions:
• Click Open and Print/Preview to display the report.
• Click Print to print the report.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Editing and Saving ICP Reports Remotely

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Editing and Saving ICP Reports Remotely
c l
r a
Depending on your security access, you may be able to save ICP reports to the server.
For example, you can change the POV, entity, partner, and matching tolerance, and

O ly
instead of saving a local copy on your computer, you may be able to save it to the server
as you do with data grids.

l & On
a e
To edit and save a ICP report remotely:
n
e r s
1. On the Reporting page, select the intercompany matching report that you want to edit.
t U
2. Click Edit.
I n
c l e
3. Make the necessary changes.
4. Click Save Remote to save the report on a server.

r a
5. Enter a file name for the report.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-17
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

6. Save the file as a report definition, XML, or HTML file.

7. Select a security class for the report.
8. Select the Overwrite existing file check box if you want to overwrite the file.
9. Click OK, and then click Close.

To print a report saved remotely:

1. From the list of reports, select the check box next to the intercompany matching
report that you want to print.
2. Click Print.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
• If you want to override values, select values, specify new values, and click OK.
• If you do not want to override values, click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Sending E-mail Alerts from an ICP Report

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Sending E-mail Alerts from an ICP Report
c l
r a
When viewing a matching report, you may notice a difference in the amounts between
the entity and its partner. If you are unable to reconcile the differences in the matching
O ly
report, you can send an e-mail alert to the partner entity. For example, if data between

additional information.
l & On
4100 and 1000 does not match, you can alert 1000 about the status and ask for

n a e
E-mail alerts are sent to the users who were assigned security rights to receive

e r
intercompany transaction alerts.
t U s
NOTE
I n
c l e
Before using the feature, you must set up and configure e-mail alerts.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-19
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

E-mail Notification Window

Because e-mail is generated for the report, the system automatically sends e-mails to
the users responsible for either the entity or partner entity. Therefore, only the option
“Generate E-mail for both the entity and partner” is available. The system generates an
e-mail to the users responsible for the entity and to the users responsible for the partner
entity.
You can include comments in the e-mail content in addition to the transaction information
included by the system.
When you generate an e-mail alert, you receive a confirmation log that includes the
information for the e-mails sent to various users.

To send an e-mail alert from an ICP matching report:

1. Run the ICP matching report.
2. In the report, click the Alert button next to the group for which you want to send an
alert.
3. Optional: In the “Comment for all alerts” text box, enter a comment.

m y
The comment is used for all the alerts that are generated.
4. Click Send. d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe how intercompany data is eliminated in Financial Management

• Create intercompany reports
• Send e-mail alerts for intercompany reports

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 8-21
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 8 Eliminating Intercompany Balances

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 9

Managing Intercompany Transactions 9

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe the intercompany transaction module
• Create intercompany transactions
• Send e-mail alerts for intercompany transactions
• Match intercompany transactions
• Lock entities

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

m y
d e
c a
e A
Intercompany Transactions Module
c l
r a
Financial Management enables you to track and reconcile intercompany transaction
details across accounts and custom dimensions.
O ly
The Intercompany Transactions module provides an efficient way to identify, report, and

l & On
reconcile intercompany account differences. With the ability to view the details of

n a e
transactions at any time, you can reconcile intercompany account differences frequently
and thus minimize the impact of such differences on the closing cycle.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Business Process for the

Intercompany Transaction Module
IC = Intercompany

Create IC Match IC
Open IC period
transaction transaction

Revise IC Generate
Post IC
transaction, if matching
transaction
needed reports

Perform drill-
through from
account balance
Lock entities Close IC period

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
l
Business Process for the Intercompany Transactions Module
c
a
The Intercompany Transactions module enables the following business process:
r
O ly
• Create intercompany transaction details at the invoice level

l & On
• Match transactions at the invoice level and match transactions in the transaction
currency as well as in the reporting or parent currency

n a e
• Drill through an intercompany matching report to the transaction details

t e r s
• Through a Web data grid or Web data form, drill through an account balance to
U
n
transactional details
I
time
c l e
• View the details of the transactions between an entity and its entity partner at any

r a
• Analyze differences due to real errors in transaction currency or differences due to
exchange rates
O • Lock entities to prevent unauthorized input

Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-3

 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Open Intercompany Periods

The period must be open before you can enter intercompany transactions.

Matching tolerances are set when

periods are opened.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Open Intercompany Periods
c l
r a
You must open the intercompany period before you can enter intercompany transactions
in it. You can specify a matching tolerance for the period and input separate matching

O ly
tolerance amounts for transaction ID tolerance, account tolerance, and manual
tolerance.

l & On
a e
You can also select the option for matching and validation:

n
t e r s
• If you select the Match/Validate Before Post option, before transactions can be
posted, you must match transactions or assign a reason code. All matched
U
I n
transactions or mismatched transactions with reason codes must be posted before a
period can be closed or an entity can be locked.

l e
• If you select the Restrict option, before transactions can be posted, you must match
c
them, but you can close periods or lock entities that have unposted transactions.

r a
O
9-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

m y
d e
ca
e A
Creating Intercompany Transactions
c l
transactions: r a
Financial Management provides two methods by which you can create intercompany

O ly
• Load intercompany transactions from ASCII files

l & On
• Manually enter transactions on the Process IC Transactions page

n a e
The following table describes the information that you can enter for transaction details:

Option
t e r U s
Description
Scenario
I n A valid scenario defined for the application.
Year

c l e A valid year defined for the application.

r a
Period A valid base period defined for the scenario.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-5
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Option Description
Transaction ID Required. You must enter an ID for the transaction, with a maximum of
40 characters. When combined with the sub ID, this ID becomes a
unique identifier for the Entity, Partner, Account, C1, C2, C3,C4
dimensions in Scenario, Year, and Period.
Transaction Sub ID Optional. You can enter a sub ID for the transaction, with a maximum
of 40 characters.
This ID is useful if you need to handle one-to-many or many-to-many
transactions between two entities. For example, if one transaction in
the originating entity's book corresponds to multiple transactions in the
partner's book, you can use the Transaction ID text box for the
common reference and the Sub ID text box for the multiple
transactions.
The sub ID is also useful when you must adjust the transaction in the
<Entity Currency> member rather than posting a journal adjustment in
the <Entity Curr Adjs> member. In this case, you can create a dummy
transaction, use the transaction ID from the original invoice, and enter
ADJ1 as the sub ID to show that it is an adjustment, not a real invoice.
Reference ID Optional. You can enter a reference ID to store reference information
for the transaction. For example, the entity might have its own set of
invoice numbering that is different from the entity that issued the

m
invoice. You can enter additional information in the Reference ID text
y
box for information purposes only.

d e
You can also use the reference ID as the partner's transaction ID. You

c a
can enter the entity's reference ID in the Transaction ID text box and
enter the corresponding invoice number from the partner entity in the
Reference text box.

e A
Transaction Date
Entity
c l
Optional. Must be a valid date.
A valid ICP base entity that is not a parent entity.
Partner Entity
r a
A valid ICP entity for the account.
Account O ly
A valid ICP account. The cell must support transactions as specified in

& On
the Rules file.

l
Custom 1-4
Transaction Amount
n a e
Valid custom members for the account.
The amount of the invoice in the currency of the transaction. Required

Transaction
t r U s
if the entity currency is not entered; otherwise, it is optional.
e
The currency used for the Invoice transaction. Must be a valid
Currency
I ncurrency defined in the application.

c l e
r a
O
9-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Option Description
Conversion Rate The rate used to convert the transaction currency amount to the local
reporting currency amount for the transaction.
During calculation of the local currency amount, if the operator is
Divide, the system uses the following formula: local currency =
transaction currency / rate. If the operator is Multiply, the system uses
the following formula: local currency = transaction currency * rate.
Operator The Multiply or Divide operator depends on the local currency of the
transaction. You must first define the Multiply or Divide operation for a
currency in the currency table of the application. The default value for
the operator is Divide.
Entity Currency The amount of the invoice in the local entity currency. The currency
Amount must be a valid currency defined in the application. This option is
required if the transaction amount is not entered. Otherwise, the
system can recalculate this information if you enter the transaction
amount and the conversion rate.
Comment 1 Optional. You can enter comments for the transaction, with a
maximum of 256 characters.
Comment 2 Optional. You can enter additional comments for the transaction, with
a maximum of 256 characters.
You can use Comment 2 to enter comments related to the partner's
m y
transaction. For example, Entity A might enter comments in
d e
Comment 1 related to the transaction. Later, Entity A might run a

c a
matching report or view the partner's transaction and realize that there
are discrepancies with the partner’s amount. Entity A can enter

A
additional comments in Comment 2 to state anything related to the
information in the partner’s record. This information becomes part of
e
c l
the transaction and can be included in the matching report for
informational or audit trail purposes.

r a
Although Comment can be used for partner information, only the entity
can enter the information. The partner entity cannot enter information
O ly
in the entity's record.
Reason Code
& On
Optional. The reason code must be a valid code defined by the
l
administrator. Its main purpose is to indicate why a transaction has a

n a e
MisMatched status; for example, because of a missing invoice from
the partner entity or an incorrect amount entered by the partner. If the

t e r U s
transaction has a Matched status, you do not need to assign a reason
code for the transaction. You cannot assign a reason code to

I ntransactions with an UnMatched status.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-7
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Loading Intercompany Transaction Files

You can select multiple external files in one load process and select
whether to merge or replace the existing transactions.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Loading Intercompany Transaction Files
c l
ASCII files.
r a
The Load IC Transactions page enables you to load transaction details from external

O ly
To load intercompany transactions, you must be assigned the Intercompany Transaction
& On
User role or the Administrator role. In addition, the administrator must have opened the
l
period for the transactions.

n a e
To load IC transactions:
t e r U s
n
1. In the Browser view, select Load Tasks > Load IC Transactions.
I
c l e
2. Select the delimiter character: @, #, $, %, ^, &, |, :, ; ?, \.
3. Select the load method:

r a • Select Merge to merge the existing transactions.

O • Select Replace to replace the existing transactions.

9-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

4. Optional: Click Scan to scan the file before loading.

5. Click Browse, and select the file to load.
6. Click Open.
7. Click Load.
The scan and load status for each file is displayed in a new
window.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-9
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Process IC Transactions Overview

Use the Process IC Transactions page to perform intercompany

transaction processes.
Transaction entries
per page

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Process IC Transactions Overview
c l
r a
The Process IC Transactions page is the main page on which you perform most
intercompany transaction processes. You use the Process IC Transactions page for
these tasks:
O ly
& On
• Create intercompany transactions
l
a e
• View intercompany transactions
n
t e r U s
• Edit intercompany transactions

n
• Match intercompany transactions
I
c l e
• Unmatch intercompany transactions
• Post intercompany transactions

r a
• Unpost intercompany transactions

O
9-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

• Filter intercompany transactions

• Delete intercompany transactions
• Report on intercompany transactions

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-11
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Creating IC Transactions
from Process IC Transactions

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Creating Transactions from Process IC Transactions
c
transactions.
r a
On the Process IC Transactions page, you can manually enter intercompany

O ly
& On
To create an intercompany transaction:
l
Reminders:

n a e
t e r U s
- For entity, partner entity, account, and custom member names, you can enter the
name or you can click Pick Members to select a member from the Member

n
Selection dialog box.
I
c l e
- If you leave the Conversion Rate text box empty and enter the Entity Currency
amount, the rate is calculated automatically.

r a
- You can assign a reason code only to a transaction with a MisMatched status.

O
9-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.

2. Select Process IC Transactions.
3. Click New.
4. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and base period.
5. In the Transaction ID text box, enter the transaction or invoice number, with a
maximum of 40 characters.
The following actions are optional:
• In the Transaction Sub ID text box, enter a subidentification for the transaction or
invoice, with a maximum of 40 characters.
• In the Reference ID text box, enter reference information for the transaction, with a
maximum of 40 characters.
• In the Transaction Date text box, enter a valid date, or click the pop-up calendar to
select a date.

from the Member Selection dialog box.

m y
6. In the Entity text box, enter an entity name, or click Pick Members to select a member

member from the Member Selection dialog box.

d e
7. In the Partner text box, enter a partner entity name, or click Pick Members to select a

c a
8. In the Account text box, enter an account name, or click Pick Members to select a
member from the Member Selection dialog box.

e A
c l
9. In the Custom 1-4 text box, enter a custom member name, or click Pick Members to
select a member from the Member Selection dialog box.

r a
10. In the Transaction Amount text box, enter the amount of the invoice and then, from
O ly
the Currency drop-down list, select the currency used for the transaction.

l & On
• In the Conversion Rate text box, enter the rate used to convert the transaction

a e
currency amount to the local reporting currency amount.

n
NOTE

t e r U s
If you leave the Conversion Rate text box empty and enter the Entity Currency

n
amount, the rate is calculated automatically.
I
l e
11. In the Entity Currency Amount text box, enter the amount of the invoice in the local
c
entity currency and enter the currency of the reporting entity.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-13
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

12. In the Comment 1 and Comment 2 text boxes, enter comments for the transaction,
with a maximum of 256 characters.
13. From the Reason Code drop-down list, select a reason code for the transaction.
NOTE
You can assign a reason code only to a transaction with the MisMatched status.

14. Click Save to save the transaction.

15. Click Close to close the dialog box.

To view intercompany transactions:

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.
2. Select Process IC Transactions.
3. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and period.
4. Select columns and rows to filter the list of transactions.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Sending E-mail Alerts

E-mail Alert

E-mail Alert
page

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Sending E-mail Alerts
c l
r a
You can send e-mail alerts for any transaction on the Process IC Transactions page. You
can generate e-mail alerts for an entity, intercompany partner, or both.
E-mail alert guidelines: O ly
l & On
• If you generate e-mail for a unique entity, the system sends alerts to the users who
a e
have access to the entity for the selected transactions.
n
e r s
• If you select multiple transactions for the same entity, the system generates only one
t
alert for each entity.
U
I n
• Users with appropriate security roles receive alerts.

c l e
• If you generate e-mail for a unique partner, the system sends alerts to the users who

r a
have appropriate access to the partner entity.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-15
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

• If you generate e-mail for both entity and partner, the system sends alerts to the
users who have appropriate access to the entity or partner entity.
You can include comments in the e-mail content in addition to the transaction information
included by the system.
When you generate an e-mail alert, you receive a confirmation log that includes the
information for the alerts sent to various users.

To send e-mail alerts from the Intercompany Transactions Process

page:
1. From the list of intercompany transactions, select a transaction.
2. On the Process IC Transactions page, click the Alert button.
3. Select an option:
• Generate e-mail for a unique entity
• Generate e-mail for a unique partner
• Generate e-mail for both entity and partner

m y
4. Optional: In the “Comment for all alerts” text box, enter a comment.

d e
The comment is used for all generated alerts.
5. Click Send.
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Matching Intercompany Transactions

Question: Why match intercompany transactions?

Answer: Matching helps reduce potential gaps between intercompany
account balances.

Entity A Entity B

Accounts Receivable Intercompany Accounts Payable Intercompany

500 500

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Matching Intercompany Transactions
c l
r a
Before you post intercompany transactions to a Financial Management intercompany
account, you can perform a matching process to ensure that both the entity and its
partner entered the transaction.
O ly
l & On
If your administrator set up the period to require matching before posting, you must

a e
match the transactions before you can post them.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-17
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Matching Transactions

ƒ Automatic matching by transaction ID, reference ID, or account with or

without tolerance amount
ƒ Manual matching with or without tolerance amount

Automatic Manual with tolerance Manual without tolerance

< 10 USD 1: 1

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Matching Transactions
c l
r a
You can use several methods to match transactions. You can allow the system to
automatically match transactions based on criteria that you specify. You can also

O ly
manually match specific transactions if the transactions are not matched by the
automatic matching process.

l & On
a e
To auto-match an intercompany transaction:
n
e r s
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.
t U
n
2. Select Process IC Transactions.
I
c l e
3. From the list of transactions, select the check box to the left of the transactions that
you want to match.

r a
4. From the Match drop-down list, select Auto-Match.

O
9-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

5. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and base period.

6. Perform one of the following actions:
• Enter the names of the Entity and Partner dimension members
• Click Browse to find the entity and partner.
7. To auto-match by specific currency, select Include During Processing, and then, from
the Only if Transaction Currency = drop-down list, select a currency.
8. Perform one of the following actions:
• Select Match by ID, select Transaction ID or Reference ID, and enter an ID or use a
wildcard.
• Select Match by Account. In the Accounts section, click Add to select the account
dimension members or custom members. In the Matching Accounts section, click
Add to select the matching account dimension members or custom members.
TIP
Click Remove to remove accounts and matching accounts.

m y
9. Click Match.
d e
To create an auto-match template:
c a
A
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.

e
2. Select Process IC Transactions.
c l
r a
3. From the Match drop-down list, select AutoMatch.

O ly
4. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and base period.

& On
5. Select the settings for auto-matching.
l
6. Click Save as Template.
n a e
t e r U s
To match intercompany transactions manually:

I n
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.

l e
2. Select Process IC Transactions.

c
a
3. From the Match drop-down list, select Manual Match.
r
O 4. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and base period.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-19

 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

5. Perform one of the following actions:

• Enter the names of the Entity and Partner dimension members.
• Click Browse to find the entity and partner.

To unmatch an intercompany transaction:

1. From the list of transactions, select the check box for the transactions that you want
to unmatch.
2. From the Match drop-down list, select UnMatch, and then select either UnMatch
Selected or UnMatch All.
3. Review the transactions to be unmatched, and click Unmatch.

TIP
To clear transactions that you do not want to unmatch, click Clear All.

4. Click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Posting Intercompany Transactions

ƒ Intercompany transactions must be posted in order to be included in an

account balance.
ƒ After a transaction is posted, no changes can be made to it.
ƒ If changes are needed to a posted transaction, you must un-post the
transaction, make the changes, and rematch and repost it.

Accounts Receivable - Intercompany

Inv 001 100

Inv 002 300
----
400
Inv 003 500
----
900

m y
500 USD

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Posting Intercompany Transactions
c l
r a
When you create or load an intercompany transaction, by default it has a status of
Unposted, and no amount is shown in the account balance. For example, you may input

O ly
an intercompany transaction for Entity A with Entity B for USD $100. However, the

l & On
amount was not yet recorded in the ICRec account. The ICRec account balance remains
at zero until the transaction is posted.

n a e
When you post the selected intercompany transactions to the account, the system

t e r U
reflected in the account balance.s
updates the status of the transactions to Posted, and the total transaction amount is

I n
c l e
To post an intercompany transaction:
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.

r a
2. Select Process IC Transactions.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-21
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

3. From the list of transactions, select the check box to the left of the transaction that
you want to post.
4. Click Post, and select Post Selected or Post All.

TIP
Posted transactions are indicated by a green flag in the Status column.

When you select Post All, some transactions may not be posted, based on their
status and the Match/Validation Before Posting requirement.
5. Perform one of the following actions to view transactions with a Posted status:
• On the Process IC Transactions page, select the POV, and review the Status
column for posted transactions.
• On the Process IC Transactions page, select the POV, and sort by Post status.
• In a Web data grid, drill down to view the transactions.
• In a Web data form, drill down to view the transactions.

m y
To unpost an intercompany transaction:

d e
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.
2. Select Process IC Transactions. c a
e A
3. From the list of transactions, select the check box to the left of the transaction that
you want to unpost.
c l
r a
4. Click Unpost, and select Unpost Selected or Unpost All.

O ly
To delete an intercompany transaction:

l & On
1. From the list of transactions, select the check box to the left of the transaction that
you want to delete.
n a e
e r s
2. Click Delete, and select Delete Selected or Delete All.
t U
I n
When you select Delete All, some transactions may not be deleted, based on their
status. For example, Posted and Matched transactions are not deleted.

c l e
3. When you receive the confirmation message, click OK.

r a
O
9-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Generating Matching Reports

Generate matching reports by:

ƒ Account
ƒ Transaction ID
ƒ Reference ID Transaction ID

Reference ID

Accounts Receivables - Interco Accounts Payables - Interco

500 500

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Generating Matching Reports
c l
r a
After loading transactions into the application and viewing the transactions either on the
Process Transactions page or in the transaction detail report, you may want to run a

O ly
matching report to identify potential matched and mismatched transactions. You can run

& On
a matching report by account, by transaction ID, or by reference ID.

l
a e
You can create a matching report by the following methods:

n
• Using the Report Wizard

t e r U s
• Writing a script in a text file

I n
c l e
To create a matching report by account:
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.

r a
2. Select Process IC Transactions.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-23
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

3. From the Reports drop-down list, select By Account.

4. On the General tab, enter a name for the report.
5. Enter a description for the report.
6. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class for the report or use
the [Default] security class.
7. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and base period.
8. Perform one of the following actions:
• In the Entity text box, enter an entity name.
• Click Browse to select an entity or an entity list.
9. Perform one of the following actions:
• In the Partner text box, enter a partner entity name.
• Click Browse to select a partner entity or entity list.
10. From the Matching Currency drop-down list, select a currency.
11. In the Suppress section, select Details or Matched, and enter a tolerance amount if
m y
required.
d e
statuses:
c a
12. In the Include During Processing section, select one or more of the following match

• Matched
e A
• Unmatched
c l
• MisMatched
r a
O ly
13. Optional: Select one or both the following post statuses: Posted or Unposted.

l & On
14. To filter by transaction currency, select the Only if Transaction Currency = check box and
enter the currency.

n a e
t e r U s
15. Perform one of the following actions on the Accounts tab:
• Click Add to select the accounts and matching accounts to be displayed in the
report.
I n
l e
• Click Remove to remove accounts from the report.
c
r a
O
9-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

16. On the Display Options tab, select the items to be displayed in the report:
• Display the dimension member label: Select the Member Label check box.
• Display the dimension member description: Select the Member Description check
box.
• Display the dimension member label and the description: Select both check boxes.
17. From the Options drop-down lists, select scale factor and decimal override values for
the transaction amounts.
18. Perform one of the following actions:
• To print or preview the report, click Print/Preview.
• To save the report locally, click Save Local.
• To save the report remotely on a server, click Save Remote.

To create a matching report by transaction or reference ID:

1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select IC Transaction Tasks.
2. Select Process IC Transactions.
m y
3. From the Reports drop-down list, select By Transaction ID.
d e
4. On the General tab, enter a name and a description for the report.
c a
A
5. From the Security Class drop-down list, select a security class for the report, or use
e
the [Default] security class.

c l
a
6. On the POV bar, select a scenario, year, and base period.
r
O ly
7. Perform one of the following actions in the Entity text box:
• Enter an entity name.

l & On
a e
• Click Browse to select an entity or entity list.

n
t e r U
• Enter a partner entity name.s
8. Perform one of the following actions in the Partner text box:

I n
• Click Browse to select a partner entity or entity list.

l e
9. From the Matching Currency drop-down list, select a currency.
c
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-25
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

10. From the ID drop-down list, select one of the following options, and then enter the IDs
in the corresponding text box:
• Transaction ID to Transaction ID
• Transaction ID to Reference ID
• Reference ID to Transaction ID
• Reference ID to Reference ID
11. In the Suppress section, select Details or Matched, and enter a tolerance amount if
required.
12. In the Include During Processing section, select items to include in the report.
13. To filter by transaction currency, select the Only if Transaction Currency = check box,
and then enter the currency.
14. On the Display Options tab, select the display and suppression options for the report.
15. Perform one of the following actions:
• To print or preview the report, click Print/Preview.

m y
• To save the report locally, click Save Local.
• To save the report remotely on a server, click Save Remote.
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

m y
d e
c a
e A
Drill-Through Reports
c l
r a
If the administrator set up an intercompany matching report to display intercompany
transaction detail for the matching group, a link is displayed on the report. When you

O ly
click the link, you can view the matching report at the transaction detail level.

& On
In the report, you can only view intercompany transactions; you cannot change the
l
transactions.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-27
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Locking Entities

After intercompany processing is complete, lock entities to ensure that no

further changes are made.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Locking Entities
c l
r a
To prevent future changes to intercompany transactions for an entity, you can apply a
lock to the entity for a scenario, year, and period. If you selected the Match/Validate
O ly
Before Post option for the period, before the entity can be locked, you must post all

& On
matched transactions and all mismatched transactions with a reason code.

l
n a e
For a locked entity, you cannot enter new intercompany transactions or delete or make
changes to existing transactions. You cannot post or unpost transactions to a locked

e r s
entity or update the match status of a transaction that involves a locked entity. Therefore,
t U
even if the partner of an entity is not locked, the partner cannot match transactions

I n
because the match status cannot be updated for the entity.

c l e
r a
O
9-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Closing Intercompany Periods

ƒ When a period is closed, no intercompany transactions can be entered.

ƒ You can still view transactions and run reports.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Closing Intercompany Periods
c l
r a
To prevent modifications to transactions, at the end of the closing cycle, after you finish
processing intercompany transactions, you can close the period. If you selected the

O ly
Match/Validate Before Post option for the period, before the entity can be locked, you

& On
must post all matched transactions and all mismatched transactions with a reason code.

l
n a e
When you close a period, the period is locked for future transactions. However, you can
continue to view transactions and run reports on the transactions for the period.

t e r
To close a intercompany period:
U s
I n
1. Navigate from the Browser view Tasks > IC Transaction Tasks > Manage IC Periods

c l e
2. Select the Period.

r a
3. Click Close Period button.

O 4. Click Save Period Settings button.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-29

 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Monitoring Intercompany Entity Status

The Monitor Intercompany Transactions task provides status information

for intercompany entities.
E-mail Alert.
Summary of Started and Not Filter by status.
Started transactions.

m y
Click an entity to view detail.
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Monitoring Intercompany Entity Status
c l
r a
The Monitor Intercompany Transactions task provides a status overview for your
intercompany entities. You can filter the list of entities by any combination of these

O ly
statuses: Started, Not Started, Not Lockable, Lockable, and Locked.

& On
• An entity has a status of Started if, in the point of view, it has at least one
l
a e
intercompany transaction for the scenario, year, and period.

n
t e r s
• An entity has a status of Not Lockable if you selected the Match/Validate Before Post
option for the period and you did not post matched transactions or mismatched
U
I n
transactions with a reason code.
You can click an entity in the list to view a pop-up window with additional detail for the
l e
entity. The detail window displays the total number of posted and unposted transactions
c
for the entity, categorized by matching status.

r a
O
9-30 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe the intercompany transactions module

• Create intercompany transactions
• Send e-mail alerts for intercompany transactions
• Match intercompany transactions
• Lock entities

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 9-31
 Module 4 Managing Intercompany Data
Lesson 9 Managing Intercompany Transactions

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-32 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 5

Consolidation and Managing Data 9

Overview
This module covers how to run the consolidation process in Financial
Management. Also covered is how to manage the review process using
process control.
Lessons in this unit include:
• Consolidating Data
• Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 1 0

Consolidating Data 10

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe the consolidation process
• Translate financial data into another currency
• Consolidate data

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

m y
d e
c a
e A
Financial Management Business Process
c l
r a
Data consolidation is one step of the business process for large (or public) companies.
Consolidation is typically performed after data is collected, calculated, and adjusted for
base-level entities.
O ly
l & On
You use the consolidation features in Financial Management to consolidate financial data
for reporting and analysis.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Consolidation Overview

NetProfit

Consolidated data
Connecticut 20000
for Connecticut entity

Administration East 6000

Marketing East 5000

Development 4000

EastSales 5000

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Consolidation Overview
c l
r a
Consolidation is the process of gathering data from descendants and aggregating the
data to parent entities. Consolidation applies only to the Entity dimension. After entering

O ly
or loading data into base-level entities, you run a consolidation for a selected scenario

& On
and period to aggregate the data throughout the organization.

l
n a e
The example shown on the slide displays the consolidated data for the NetProfit account
of the Connecticut entity. During consolidation, the data values of the base-level entities

t e r U s
(Administration East, Marketing East, Development, and EastSales) are rolled up to the
parent-level entity, Connecticut.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-3
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Consolidation Process

ƒ Run calculation
ƒ Perform currency translations
ƒ Apply ownership percentages
ƒ Eliminate intercompany balances

US

Connecticut
m y
California
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Consolidation Process
c l
entity run automatically.
r a
When you consolidate an entity, processes that are required for the descendants of the

O ly
• Calculation rules are run for all descendants of the entity for the period being
& On
consolidated and for all prior periods.
l
a e
• If the data for the child entity and the data for the parent entity are in different
n
t e r s
currencies, the data is translated based on the exchange rate. For the child entity, the
translated value is stored in the Parent Currency member of the Value dimension. It
U
I n
is the translated value in Parent Currency that is rolled up to the parent.
• If the parent’s ownership of the child is less than 100%, the ownership percentage is
l
applied.
c e
r a
• Intercompany transactions between entities are eliminated at their first common
parent.
O
10-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Translating Data

USD

Entity Currency = USD

Geographical

EUR

Europe Parent Currency = USD

Entity Currency = EUR

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Translating Data
c l
r a
Translation converts values from one currency to another. When you consolidate,
currency translation occurs only if the parent currency is different from the child currency.
O ly
The translated value is stored in the Parent Currency member.

l & On
• For Revenue and Expense accounts, values are translated using the rate account

n a e
that is specified by the DefaultRateForFlow application setting. If you enable the
PVAForFlow application setting the periodic value add (PVA) translation method is

e r s
selected; otherwise the VAR method is selected.
t U
I n
• For Asset and Liability accounts, values are translated using the rate account
specified by the DefaultRateForBalance application setting. If you enable the

l e
PVAForBalance application setting, the PVA translation method is selected;

c
otherwise the VAR method is selected.

r a
You may need to translate to currencies other than the parent currency. The Value

Odimension contains members for all application currencies.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-5

 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Translating Data in Data Grids

Entities with a currency different Select Translate to

from the one shown in the POV bar translate data to the
show a status of TR or TR ND until currency shown on the
the data is translated. POV bar.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Translating Data in Data Grids
c l
r a
After entering the exchange rates, you can translate the entity’s currency to an
application currency in the Value dimension. If the Value dimension is not on the grid

O ly
rows or columns, the destination currency is specified in the point of view.

To translate data:
l & On
n a e
1. In a data grid, select the point of view.

t e r U s
2. Select a cell for which you want to run translation logic.

I n
3. Right-click and select Translate to translate the selected cells.

c l e
NOTE
The option Force Translate is available to force translation to run for all

r a selected cells.

O
10-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Entering Exchange Rates

Exchange rate
account

The custom dimensions contain

system-defined currency members.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Entering Exchange Rates
c l
r a
You maintain currency rates by inputting data to the currency members of the Custom1
and Custom2 dimensions. There are system-defined currency members in the Custom1

O ly
and Custom2 dimension for each currency in the application. In the slide example,

& On
Custom1 is the source currency and Custom2 is the destination currency.

l
a e
You must input currency rates to accounts that have the Currencyrate account type.

n
t e r
• Row dimension = Custom1
U s
In data grids, you can enter currency rates by using the following settings:

I n
• Column dimension = Custom2

l e
• Row list and column list = Member lists that contain the application currencies
c
r a
• You translate the currency in Custom1 to the currency in Custom2.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-7
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

You enter currency rates by using the points of view described in the following table:

Dimension Description
Scenario The scenario to which the currency rate is applied
Year The year to which the currency rate is applied
Period The period to which the currency rate is applied
View YTD
Entity [None]
Value [None]
Account The account that you create to contain currency rates (The account type
must be Currencyrate.)
ICP [ICP None]
Custom1 Source currency
Custom2 Destination currency
Custom3 [None]
Custom4 [None]

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Consolidation and the Value Dimension

Contribution Total stores

the value that aggregates
to the parent.

These members store

the intermediary values used
to derive Contribution Total.

Entity Currency stores

the original input value.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Consolidation and the Value Dimension
c l
r a
During the consolidation process, the value in the Entity Currency member of the child
members may go through transformation before being aggregated to the parent. The
O ly
Value dimension stores data for the intermediary steps in the transformation. You can

l & On
display Value dimension members on data grids and reports. This information provides
an audit trail that you can use to determine how the value that each entity contributed to
the parent was derived.
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-9
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Value Dimension Consolidation Process

[Contribution Total]

[Contribution] [Contribution Adjs]

[Proportion] [Elimination]

[Parent Total]

[Parent] [Parent Adjs]

<Parent Currency Total>

<Parent Currency> <Parent Curr Adjs>

<Entity Currency Total>

m y
<Entity Currency> <Entity Currency Adjs>

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Value Dimension Consolidation Process
c l
a
In the slide, the gray circles indicate the Value dimension members that store data.
r
O ly
Keep in mind the following points about the consolidation process:

l & On
• Proportion detail is generated when consolidation rules are executed. The Proportion
member also stores the results of the consolidation percentage that is applied to the
base values.
n a e
e r s
• Based on elimination rules, elimination detail contains eliminating balances that
t U
result during consolidation based on elimination rules.

I n
• Contribution Total is the contribution of the base entity to its parent. This amount is

l e
added to the other immediate dependent contributions of the parent to obtain the

c
parent’s consolidated data. Intermediate contribution-level aggregations are not

r a
stored during calculation.

O
10-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Checking Calculation Status

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Checking Calculation Status
c l
r a
Financial Management maintains the calculation status for every Scenario, Year, Period,
Entity, Parent, and Value combination. The calculation status indicates whether you

O ly
should calculate, translate, or consolidate the data.

& On
You can view the calculation status from the Process Control panel or from a data grid.
l
Calculation Status option.
n a e
To view the calculation status from a data grid, in the Grid Settings dialog box, select the

e r s
The following table describes calculation statuses:
t U
Status
I n
Description
OK

c l e
None of the data for the specified Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, and Value
dimensions changed.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-11
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Status Description
OK SC OK, System Changed. A change may affect the data for the specified Scenario,
Year, Period, Entity, and Value dimensions.
Take the example of a new rules file or metadata file. The data itself (a value of
10,000) did not change, but a changed dimension member attribute (the number
of decimal places associated with the account was changed to 2) requires the
value to be changed to 10,000.00.
OK ND OK, No Data. The calculation was effectively run, but calculations were not run for
no data.
CH Needs Calculation. At least one data cell for the specified Scenario, Year, Period,
Entity, and Value dimensions changed, or metadata parameters or rules changed.
As a result, because the calculation was not run, other data cells in the dimension
may not be current. For base-level entities, you may have entered the data cell
through data entry or by a data file load. For any entity, the data cell may have
been entered by a journal posting.
TR Needs Translation. The selected Value dimension member is not the entity’s
default currency, and its translated values may not be current.
CN Needs Consolidation. The data for the specified Scenario, Year, Period, Entity,
and Value dimensions may not be current because of a change to the following
y
items: data for a child entity, data for the entity's default currency, or metadata
parameters or rules.
m
CN ND
e
Needs Consolidation. The parent has no data, but data for a child entity changed.
d
Locked
a
The data for the specified Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, and Value dimensions

c
was locked by an administrator. It can no longer be modified manually or through

NoData
calculations.

e A
The specified Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, and Value dimensions do not have
data.
c l
NoAccess
a
The user does not have rights for the specified dimension member.
r
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Consolidation Percentages Overview

Sample Organization Ownership Structure

Geographical
100% 100%

100% United States Europe 90%

California Connecticut France Italy

80% 50%

Plant 1 East Sales Plant 2

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Consolidation Percentages Overview
c l
r a
By default, parents consolidate their children 100 percent. However, you can specify a
consolidation percentage. The consolidation percentage determines what percent of a

O ly
child entity is consolidated to the parent entity. The administrator enters the consolidation

& On
percentage for your application during application setup.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-13
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Running Consolidations

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Running Consolidations
c l
r a
You run consolidations from the Consolidate options list on the Process Control Panel
and on data grids. You can use the Task Automation functionality to automate the

O ly
process. When a parent is consolidated, all descendants of the parent are also
consolidated.

l & On
n a e
If you consolidate data for a period and the data for prior periods was not consolidated,
the data for the prior periods is also consolidated.
NOTE
t e r U s
value. I n
Consolidation is run for all cells in the current scenario, year, period, entity, and

c l e
r a
O
10-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

The following table describes the three options for consolidating data:

Option Description
Consolidate Available for any parent entity with a status of CN or CN ND.
For a parent entity, the system performs calculations (Calculate, Translate,
and Consolidate) for dependent entities whose status is CN, CN ND, CH,
TR, or TR ND.
Consolidate is the most efficient option because only entities that require
consolidation are updated.
Consolidate All Available for any parent entity, regardless of its status. Consolidate All
consolidates all intersections of the dependants, whether data exists or not.
The system also executes the dependent entities’ calculation rules. This
option is useful when an update from prior periods is required or when an
entity with no data needs to be populated using allocations.
Consolidate All Available for any parent entity, regardless of its status. Consolidate All With
With Data Data consolidates every dependent entity that contains data, regardless of
its status. The system also executes the dependent entities’ calculation
rules.

To consolidate data:
m y
d e
1. Open a data grid, select the point of view, and select a cell for which you want to run
consolidation.
c a
2. Right-click and select an option:

e A
c l
• Select Consolidate to consolidate the selected entity.
• Select Consolidate All to consolidate all selected entities, whether or not they
contain data.
r a
O ly
• Select Consolidate All With Data to consolidate all selected entities that contain data.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-15
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Viewing Consolidation Progress

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Consolidation Progress
c l
r a
When a consolidation starts, the consolidation progress bar is automatically displayed in
a separate window. You can view information about the completion status of the

O ly
consolidation, the start time, and the point of view. The consolidation progress bar

new session.
l & On
enables you to perform other tasks while the consolidation is running, without starting a

n a e
t e r
To view consolidation progress:

U s
1. In a data grid, select a cell for which you want to run consolidation.

I n
2. Right-click and select Consolidate, Consolidate All, Consolidate All with Data, Calculate

l e
Contribution, or Force Calculate Contribution.

c
r a
O
10-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

3. Perform an action:
• On the Consolidation Progress page, view the progress of the task that is currently
running.
• On the Running Tasks page, from the Task Filter drop-down list, select
Consolidation and click View to view the progress.
NOTE
Select the Administration menu to access the Running Tasks page.

To cancel a consolidation task:

• Perform an action:
• On the Consolidation Progress page, click Cancel.
• On the Running Tasks page, in the Stop Task column, click the red circle icon.
• On the Running Tasks page, from the Task Filter drop-down list, select
Consolidation and click Stop Task.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 10-17
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 10 Consolidating Data

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe the consolidation process

• Translate financial data into another currency
• Consolidate data

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 1 1

Managing the Review Cycle Using

Process Control 11

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe process management
• Describe process units
• Describe security roles in process management
• View process unit status
• Describe validation accounts
• Calculate and consolidate data
m y
• Start, submit, approve, and publish process units
d e
• Lock and unlock process units
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process Management Overview

Use Process Management to review, promote, submit, approve, reject,

and publish process units.

Review Promote Submit Approve Publish

Reject

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Process Management Overview
c l
r a
Process Management is the management of the review and approval of financial data.
You can use Process Management to submit budget plans and have them approved
O ly
efficiently, and to transfer ownership of data. In a centralized environment, you can also

& On
use Process Management to provide review control and to ensure data privacy.

l
n a e
If Process Management is enabled for a scenario, validation checks are performed for
each process unit as the data moves from one level to the next. Validation checks are

e r s
defined by the administrator to ensure that accounts are in balance.
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process Units

Example

ƒ Scenario Actual
ƒ Year 2005
ƒ Period January
ƒ Entity West Sales
ƒ Value USD

Process Unit

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Process Units
c l
r a
For the purpose of review, data is organized into process units. A process unit is the
combination of data for a specific Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, and Value dimension. In
O ly
the Value dimension, you can select Local, Translated, or Contribution data.

l & On
During the review cycle, you perform actions on process units, such as promote, submit,
approve, reject, and publish.

n a e
e r s
Submission Phases and Process Units
t U
I n
You can use submission phases for Process Management, which enables accounts to
be defined for each phase of review submission. During the review process, you can

l e
promote each phase of the process unit rather than the entire process unit. This way, you
c
eliminate the need for additional scenarios to enforce the review process.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-3
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Administrators define and set up submission phases in metadata files. Administrators

also display and manage submission phases using the Manage Submission Phases
task. You must be assigned the Administrator or Review Supervisor security role to
access the Manage Submission Phases task page.
NOTE
Submission phases can vary by period and scenario.

Submission Groups
Administrators use the Manage Submission Phases task page to assign submission
groups to phases. The assignment must be done by Scenario and Period.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process States

Every process unit has one of the following states:

Not Started

First Pass

Review Level 1, 2,…

Submitted

Approved

m y
Published

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Process States
c l
a
Process units pass through a number of process states during the review cycle:
r
Task Description
O ly
Not Started
& On
The review supervisor has not yet started the process unit, and data

l
cannot be entered by any users except the supervisor.
First Pass
n a e
The process unit is started and is in the initial stage for data to be

Review Level 1-10

t r U s
entered by users with the proper access rights.

e
The process unit is at the designated review level.
Submitted
I n The process unit was submitted and is ready for final approval.
Approved

c
Publishedl e The process unit was approved.
The process unit was published for public access.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-5
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process Management Security Roles

ƒ Security roles determine the review actions that users can perform.
ƒ Use security roles to aid compliance with Sarbanes-Oxley, especially
requirements imposed by Section 404.

Reviewer 1 Reviewer 2 Submitter Review

Supervisor

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Process Management Security Roles
c l
a
The actions that you can perform are determined by your assigned security roles:
r
Security Role O ly
Description
Reviewers 1 through 9
l & On
Can promote a process unit to the next level or reject it. After a

a e
reviewer promotes a unit the next level, data for that unit becomes
read-only for users at the current level.
n
Reviewer 10

t e r U s
Can reject a process unit, but cannot promote it because a next level
is not available. To move to the Submitted level for final approval,

Submitter I n Reviewer 10 must be a Submitter.

Can move the process unit to the final stage of the review process

c l e so that it is ready for approval. Although the default action is to

promote the process unit to the next level, the Submitter can omit

r a many levels of review and go to the last process level (Submitted)

before final approval.

O
11-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Security Role Description

Review Supervisor The highest level for the application. Has access rights to start a
process unit that allows input to the entity’s data. Can also approve
and publish the data.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-7
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Security Access for Process Units

You access data in a process unit based on a combination of the following

items:
ƒ Your assigned security role
ƒ Your access rights to the process unit (through security classes)
— None
— Read
— Promote
— All
ƒ The current review level of the process unit

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Security Access for Process Units
c l
a
Access rights for process units can be None, Read, Promote, or All.
r
Access Description
O ly
None
& On
No access to the process unit
l
Read
a e
Ability to view only data for the process unit

n
Promote
All
t e r U s
Ability to view data and promote an entity without All access
Complete access, including viewing and modifying data

I n
c l e
r a
O
11-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Viewing Process Unit Status

Select the POV

Process Control tool bar

Submission phase

Process unit status

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Viewing Process Unit Status
c l
r a
You view the status for process units on the Process Control panel. The panel contains a
point of view with the Scenario, Year, and Period dimensions. If submission phases is
O ly
enabled, the review level for each process unit is stored by submission phase.

To view process unit status: l & On

n a e
t e r
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select Data Tasks.
2. Select Process Control.
U s
I n
Process Control page displays status columns for process units.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-9
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process control toolbar:

Button Description
Options for displaying, filtering, and sorting

Refresh grid—Refreshes grid after process control actions

Manage Process
• Start
• Promote
• Submit
• Approve
• Publish
• Sign Off
• Reject
Consolidate options
• Consolidate
m y
• Consolidate All

d e
• Consolidate All With Data
• Calculate Contribution
c a
• Force Calculate Contribution

e A
Calculate options
• Calculate
c l
r a
• Force Calculate

O ly
Translate options

l & On
• Translate
• Force Translate

n a e
Summary views

t e r s
• Review Level Summary

U
I n • Calculate Status Summary
Rates—Link to a predefined Web grid with rate data (The grid label for

c l e the predefined Web grid must be named Rates)

r a
O
11-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Button Description
Ownership Management

Page Up and Page Down

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-11
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process Control Panel Options

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Process Control Panel Options
c l
r a
You use the Process Control Options dialog box to specify how process unit status is
displayed. display the entity list as a flat list or as a tree hierarchy. Use the tree hierarchy

O ly
only if you select the [Hierarchy] system member list. All other lists are displayed as a flat

& On
list. In tree hierarchy view, row sorting or filtering is unavailable.

l
Tasks:

n a e
select Options.
t e r U s
• Set display options for the Process Control panel: On the Process Control toolbar,

I n
• Expand and collapse a hierarchy (tree view only): Next to an entity, click the plus (+)
or minus (-) sign.

c l e
r a
O
11-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Filters and Sorting

When you use a list view, row sorting and filtering are available. For example, you can
filter rows based on the review level and display all rows above or below a specific
review level, such as all levels above First Pass.
After you set the following filtering options, the settings are displayed in tooltips for the
columns in the Process Control panel:
• Filter by review level, such as First Pass, Review Level 1.
• Filter rows by validation status, such as Pass Only or Fail Only.
• Filter rows by calculation status, such as OK, CN, or TR.

Entity View
You can view entity information using the entity label, the description, or both. The
default setting is to display the label.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-13
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Viewing Status for Multiple Submission Phases

Use the Columns tab to select phases.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Viewing Status for Multiple Submission Phases
c
r a
You use the Columns tab of the Process Control Options dialog box to select the
submission phases for which you want to view status. You also select the review and

O ly
status information for which you want to include columns.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Viewing Status for All Periods

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Status for All Periods
c l
r a
The Columns tab of the Process Control Options dialog box enables you to view either a
single period or all periods. When you choose all periods, you can view status for only

O ly
one submission phase at a time, and you must choose to view either the Process Review
Level or Calculation Status.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-15
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Managing Validation Accounts

Validation accounts:
ƒ Are used as a balancing mechanism
ƒ Must have an account balance equal to zero before a process unit can
be promoted to the next review level
ƒ Must have a formula defined in the rules file to generate its balance

Total Assets + $3000 Total Assets + $2000

Total Liability - $1000 Total Liability - $1000
Total NetWorth - $1000 Total NetWorth - $1000
Difference = $1000 Difference = $ 0
Nonvalidated accounts Validated accounts

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Managing Validation Accounts
c l
Management. r a
The administrator uses rules to customize how validation happens in Process

O ly
If you are using phased submissions, you can have separate validation accounts for

l & On
each submission phase. Financial Management application settings include additional

a e
validation accounts that you can use for each submission phase:

n
t e r U s
Validation Account= (current validation account; now used for Submission Phase 1)
Validation Account2 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 2)

I n
Validation Account3 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 3)

c l e
Validation Account4 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 4)

r a
Validation Account5 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 5)

O
11-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Validation Account6 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 6)

Validation Account7 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 7)
Validation Account8 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 8)
Validation Account9 =<valid account> (for Submission Phase 9)

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-17
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process Unit Validation

This column indicates A check mark is displayed

whether there if both the Validation account
are unposted journals. and calculation status are
OK.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Process Unit Validation
c l
r a
Process units can be promoted only if their calculation status is OK or NODATA and the
validation account amount is equal to zero. The Pass/Fail column displays icons to show

O ly
whether these conditions are met. If the calculation status is OK or NODATA and the

l & On
validation account amount is equal to zero, a check mark is displayed in the Pass/Fail
column, indicating that the unit is ready for promotion. If the process unit fails, an X is

a e
displayed in the Pass/Fail column.
n
t e r U s
If the process unit fails, you must perform calculation in the current period to ensure that
the data is valid for promotion. After calculation, if the validation account is equal to zero,

I n
the calculation status is updated to OK and the status of the column changes to Pass.

c l e
r a
O
11-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

The journal status column displays the status of journals. The column title varies based
on the member selected for data view:

Data View Column Title

Local The column displays the status of Entity Currency Adjustments (ECA).
Translation The column displays the status of Parent Currency Adjustments (PCA).
Contribution The system displays a column for the status of Parent Adjustments (PA)
and a column for Contribution Adjustments (CA).

In the journal status column, a green flag indicates that there are no unposted journals. A
red flag indicates that unposted journals must be posted for the entity. However,
unposted journals do not prevent an entity from being promoted.
When you hover the cursor over a flag in the journal status column, the number of
unposted journals is displayed. When you click the flag, the Journals module opens so
that you can view the unposted journals for the selected process unit. You can then post
the journals.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-19
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Viewing Validation Account Detail

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Validation Account Detail
c l
r a
The Pass/Fail column is linked to the Validation Account Detail page so that you can view
additional details about calculation status and validation account information. This link

O ly
displays all children associated with the validation account, as well as balances in those

information:
l & On
accounts. When you drill down to the detail screen, the system displays the following

n a e
• Calculation status for Entity Currency, Entity Curr Adjs, and Entity Curr Total

e r s
• Validation account amount for Entity Currency, Entity Curr Adjs, and Entity Curr Total
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

To view validation account detail:

1. In the Process Control panel, select the entities whose validation account detail you
want to view.
2. In the Pass/Fail column, click the icon of the selected entity.
The Validation page is displayed.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-21
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Calculating and Consolidating Data

Consolidate
options

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Calculating and Consolidating Data
c l
r a
If you need to promote a process unit that does not have the correct status (for example,
CN or CN ND), you can calculate or consolidate the process unit directly from the
O ly
Consolidate options drop-down list on the Process Control panel if you have the
appropriate security access.

l & On
n a e
To calculate and force calculate data:

e r s
1. In the Process Control panel, select a process control unit.
t U
I n
2. Click the Calculate button and select Calculate or Force Calculate.

c l e
r a
O
11-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

To consolidate data, calculate contributions, and force calculate

contributions:
1. In the Process Control panel, select a process control unit.
2. Click the Consolidate button.
3. Select an option:
• Consolidate
• Consolidate All
• Consolidate All with Data
• Calculate Contribution
• Force Calculate Contribution

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-23
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Moving Process Units Through the Review Cycle

You use the Manage Process options to move process units through the
review cycle.

Manage
Process options

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Moving Process Units Through the Review Cycle
c
r a
Process units must have a calculation status of OK, OK SC, or NO DATA and a zero
balance in the validation account before you can promote them. Process units with
unposted journals can be promoted.
O ly
l & On
When you promote parent entity data to the next process level, validation checks are

n a e
performed to verify that the child entities are at the level to which you are trying to
promote the parent. A parent can be promoted only to a level that is less than or equal to

e r
the lowest level of its children.
t U s
I n
To promote process units for review:

l e
• Select the units and select Manage Process > Promote.
c
r a
O
11-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Submission Phases and Review Levels

The review level for each process unit is stored by submission phase. You must promote
each submission phase independently. All rules for promotion to each review level apply.
In addition, there is the following dependency based on the submission phase number:
The review level of a submission phase must be less than or equal to the review level of
the lower-numbered phases in that process unit.
For example, you could divide Income, Balance Sheet, and Supplemental accounts into
three submission groups. The groups for Income and Balance Sheet accounts are
assigned to Phase 1 and the group for Supplemental accounts is assigned to Phase 2.
If the Phase 1 accounts, Balance Sheet and Income, are at Review Level 4, you cannot
promote Phase 2 account, Supplemental, to a review level greater than 4. In the same
way, you cannot reject a submission group if it violates the submission phase rule.
The following table describes the options on the Manage Process menu:

Option Description
Start Used by the Review Supervisor to bring data to First Pass. Cells on data entry
forms and grids for a process unit display NONACCESS until the process unit is
started.
m y
Promote
e
Promotes process units for all review levels. After a process unit is promoted for

d
review, data for the process unit can viewed only by a user with the appropriate

c a
review-level security role. For example, if the process unit is promoted to Review
Level 2, only a user with the Review Level 2 or higher security role can view the
data.
Submit
e
Submits process units for final approval. A
Approve
c l
Approves process units. A process unit must have a status of OK, OK SC, or NO

Publish
DATA to be approved.

r a
Publishes process units after they are approved. When process units are
O ly
published, the data is available for viewing by all users with security access to

Sign Off
l & On
the data in the process unit.
Signs off on process units from Review Level 1 or higher. When a process unit is

a e
signed off, its status does not change.

n
Reject
r s
Rejects process units and demotes them to their previous review level.

t e U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-25
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

E-mail Alerts and Process Management

Reviewers 4 Promoted process unit Reviewers 5

m y
Confirmation e-mail
E-mail server
Alert e-mail
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
E-mail Alerts and Process Management
c l
r a
If e-mail alerting is enabled for the process unit scenario, Process Management triggers
e-mail alerts based on a change of status for the process unit. Alerts are sent for the

O ly
following actions: First Pass, Review Levels 1 through 10, Submitted, Approved, and

for the Sign Off action.

l & On
Published. Alerts are not generated when the process unit is at the Not Started level or

n a e
The system automatically generates e-mail alerts to the appropriate users for the action,

t e r U s
according to the review level assignments. The system sends e-mail alerts to both the
users at the level before the process control action and to the users at the current level
after the action.
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

For example, User A and User B have Reviewer 4 role access, and Users C and D have
Reviewer 5 role access. When the process unit is at Level 4 and is promoted to Level 5,
Users A and B receive e-mail alerts because they are at Level 4 before the promote
action. Users C and D receive e-mail alerts because they are at Level 5, which is the
current level after the promote action.
When the e-mail alert is generated, the user who performed the action receives a
confirmation e-mail that contains the action performed, the process units affected as part
of the action, and the names of the users receiving the e-mail alerts for each process
unit.
Requirements for E-mail Alerts
The following conditions must be met for users to receive e-mail alerts when process
status changes:
• An SMTP mail server must be specified on the Web Server tab of Financial
Management Configuration Utility.
• The alerting process uses the e-mail addresses that are stored in your external
authentication files. To receive e-mail alerts, users must be on either LDAP or

from NT LAN Manager (NTLM) providers.

m y
Microsoft Active Directory; external authentication does not support e-mail addresses

• The Supports Process Management-A attribute, which is set in the Metadata

d e
Manager, must be enabled for the process unit scenario.
c a
A
• The user must have the Receive E-mail Alerts from Process Management user role.

e
entity and scenario.
c l
• The user must have e-mail alert access to the security class for the process unit

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-27
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Selecting Review Levels

Available
review levels

Promote
current entity
only or include
descendants

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Selecting Review Levels
c l
r a
When you select the Promote option from the Manage Process menu, the Promote page
is displayed. You use the Promote To drop-down list to select the review level. If the

O ly
entity is a parent, you can also promote its descendants.

l & On
To promote a process unit from the Process Control panel:

n a e
1. In the Browser View pane, expand Tasks and select Data Tasks.

t e r
2. Select Process Control.
U s
I n
3. Set the rows and columns.

l e
4. Select the process unit that you want to promote.
c
a
5. Click the Manage Process toolbar button, and select Promote from the drop-down list.
r
O
11-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

6. From the Review Level drop-down list, select a review level.

7. Optional: Perform any action:
• In the Comments text box, enter a comment.
• In the Comments text box, attach a document.
• If you are using the Tree view, select Selected Entity Only or Selected Entity and
Descendants.
8. Click Promote.

To submit, approve, sign off, publish, and reject a process unit from
the Process Control Panel:
1. In the Browser View pane, expand Tasks and select Data Tasks.
2. Select Process Control.
3. Set the rows and columns.
4. Select the process unit
5. Click the Manage Process toolbar button, and select an action:
m y
• Submit
d e
• Approve
c a
• Sign Off

e A
• Publish
c l
• Reject
r a
6. Optional: Perform any action:
O ly
& On
• In the Comments text box, enter a comment.
l
a e
• In the Comments text box, attach a document.
n
Descendants.
t e r U s
• If you are using the Tree view, select Selected Entity Only or Selected Entity and

I n
7. Select the appropriate action to accept your changes:

l e
• For submitting a process unit, click Submit.
c
r a
• For approving a process unit, click OK.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-29
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

• For signing off a process unit, click OK.

• For publishing a process unit, click Publish.
• For rejecting a process unit, click Reject.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-30 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Attaching Documents
Attach documents to process units from the Manage Process page.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Attaching Documents
c l
r a
In addition to entering comments in the Comments field, you can attach one or more
documents to cells for additional detail. The attached document is associated with the

O ly
Scenario, Year, Period, and Entity, dimensions and with a process level.

& On
You can download the attached document, but you cannot detach it from the process
l
unit.

n a e
e r
To attach documents to a cell:
t U s
n
1. In the Browser View, select Tasks > Data Tasks > Process Control.
I
c l e
2. Select the process unit to which you want to attach a document.
3. Click the Manage Process button and select an action for the process unit.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-31
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

4. From the Manage Process page, click Attach.

A list of custom documents is displayed.
5. Select one or more documents to associate with the process unit, and click Attach.

NOTE
You cannot attach private documents.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-32 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Viewing Review History in Data Grids

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Review History in Data Grids
c l
r a
The Process Flow History page displays process history by date and time, user, action
taken, process level, and comments. You cannot change or delete the information. It is

O ly
automatically updated as units are processed by individual users.

To view the review histor y:

l & On
n a e
1. In the Browser View, expand Tasks and select Data Tasks.

t e r
2. Select Process Control.
U s
I n
3. Set the rows and columns.

l e
4. Right-click and select Process Flow History.
c
a
5. Click Close Window.
r
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-33
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Viewing Process Level in Data Grids

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Process Level in Data Grids
c l
a
You can perform Process Management tasks in data grids.
r
O ly
To view process levels in data grids:

l & On
1. Perform one of the following actions:

n a e
• Select Administration > Manage Documents, select the Data Grid tab, and click the grid
name.

t e r U s
• In the Browser View pane, select the Data Grids link and click the grid name.

I n
2. Click the Grid Settings toolbar button and select the Display Options tab.

c l e
3. In the Cell area, select Process Level and click OK.

r a
O
11-34 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Managing Process Unit States in Data Grids

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Managing Process Unit States in Data Grids
c l
a
You can promote, submit, approve, publish, and lock a process unit from a data grid.
r
O ly
Criteria for Phased Submissions in data grids:

l & On
• If a cell is selected in a data grid and Process Management is selected, the system
determines the submission phase that applies to the cell.

n a e
• You can have one review status for each submission phase. When cells are

t e r U s
promoted, you promote all cells for that submission phase.

I n
To promote, submit, approve, sign off, publish, and reject process

c l e
units in data grids:
1. In a data grid, select the cell for the process unit.

r a
2. Right-click and select Manage Process.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-35
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

3. Select an action:
• Promote
• Submit
• Approve
• Sign Off
• Publish
• Reject
4. From the Promotion Level drop-down list, select the review level for the process unit.
5. Optional: Perform any action:
• In the Comments text box, enter a comment.
• In the Comments text box, attach a document.
6. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-36 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Locking and Unlocking Data

Submit Data for Review

Approve/Publish Data

Change display
Lock Data

m y
settings to
calculation status
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Locking and Unlocking Data
c l
r a
After publishing submitted data, you may need to lock data to prevent modifications.
Locking prevents changes for a selected category, year, and period.
O ly
You can lock data only if the following conditions are met:

l & On
• The calculation status for the entity is OK.

n a e
• All prior periods are locked.

t e r U s
• The validation account for the Entity Currency and Entity Currency Adjs members of

n
the Value dimension is zero.
I
c l e
• If the current scenario is enabled for Process Management, the process unit status is
Published.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-37
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Process for Locking Phased Submissions

The locked status is a calculation status and applies to the entire process unit. Before
applying locked status, the system checks for the following conditions:
• All processing unit cells reached the Published status or are “Not Supported.”
• All validation accounts have the appropriate phases and a zero value.
NOTE
You can lock and unlock data only in a data grid.

To lock or unlock data:

1. Right-click one or more cells for which you want to lock or unlock data.
2. Select Lock or Unlock.
TIP
To lock data for an entire entity hierarchy, select only the top parent. When you
lock a parent entity, the descendants of the parent are also locked. When
unlocking data, you must unlock a parent entity before you unlock its children
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-38 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe Process Management

• Start, submit, approve, and publish process units
• Lock and unlock process units

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 11-39
 Module 5 Consolidation and Managing Data
Lesson 11 Managing the Review Cycle Using Process Control

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-40 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 6

Reporting and Analyzing Data 11

Overview
This module covers how to use the Hyperion System 9 SmartView
Excel Add In to enter, view, and analyze data.
Lessons in this unit include:
• Analyzing Data with Smart View
• Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View
• Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 1 2

Analyzing Data with Smart View 12

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe the purpose of using Smart View
• View and edit Smart View toolbar
• Connect to a data source
• View data by using the Ad Hoc Analysis tool
• Create free-form worksheets in Smart View

m y
• View calculated, translated, and consolidated data status in Smart View
• Present Financial Management data in Word and PowerPoint
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Smart View Overview

ƒ Smart View is a Microsoft Excel add-in that enables you to use the
familiar Excel interface to view and analyze data.
ƒ Using menu-driven options in Microsoft Office, you can import data and
images from Hyperion products into Office.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Smart View Overview
c l
r a
Smart View provides the framework to integrate Microsoft Office products with Financial
Management, Planning, Financial Reporting, and Web Analysis information. Smart View
O ly
replaces the existing spreadsheet add-ins for Financial Management and Planning.

l & On
With Smart View, you can take advantage of Microsoft Office features such as smart tags

n a e
and dynamic data points. To view imported data in Office, all users in an organization
must have Smart View installed on their computers.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Smart View Installation Components

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Smart View Installation Components
c l
r a
Smart View consists of two parts: a provider that is installed on the Financial
Management Web server, and a client component. The client component must be

O ly
installed in order for end users to access the Hyperion menu in Microsoft Office.
NOTE
l & On
n a e
When you use Smart View, you must disable the Microsoft Excel functions
AutoSum and AutoCalculate.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-3
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Smart View Business Process

1 Connect. 2 View and analyze.

3 Save and submit data

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Smart View Business Process
c l
a
1. Connect to the Financial Management data source.
r
O ly
2. View and analyze data in the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

& On
3. Optional: Send data back to Financial Management to update the database.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Smart View Toolbar

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Smart View Toolbar
c l
r a
Smart View provides a convenient Excel toolbar that contains buttons for accessing most
Smart View commands. By holding your cursor over a Smart View toolbar button, you
O ly
can view a short description of the button in a pop-up box.

l & On
After you install Smart View for Office, the Smart View toolbar is displayed in Excel

a e
automatically. You can choose to display or hide the toolbar.

n
t e r U s
In Smart View, you can right-click on a spreadsheet to open a shortcut menu that repeats
many of the commands that you can access on the Hyperion menu bar.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-5
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

You can customize the Smart View toolbar so that it contains only the buttons that you
want to see. The following table describes frequently used toolbar buttons:

Name Description
Connection Displays the Connection Manager dialog box, where you can add, delete,
Manager edit, and set data source connections.
Zoom In Retrieves and expands data from the connected data source, according to
the options specified in the Options dialog box.
Zoom Out Collapses the view in the cell containing the member that you want to
collapse, according to the options specified in the Options dialog box.
Pivot Pivots the data to change its orientation in the worksheet.
Keep Only Retains only the selected member (the active cell) or member range in the
worksheet. When you click Keep Only, all unselected members are removed
from the worksheet.
Remove Only Removes the selected member (the active cell) or member range from the
worksheet. When you click Remove Only, all unselected members are
retained in the worksheet.
Refresh Retrieves data from the connected data source into the active worksheet. A
refresh request places data at the beginning of the active worksheet.

m y
Submit Data
e
In Financial Management, saves data updates made in Ad Hoc mode to the
database for the connected application.
d
Adjust
a
Adjusts the value of the selected data cell or range of data cells.
c
Cell Text
A
Displays the Cell Text dialog box, where you can edit the supporting text for
a range of grid cells. The selected cell range can be one-dimensional or two-

e
Options
dimensional.

c l
Displays the Options dialog box, where you can set end-user display

r a
preferences, including Ad Hoc options, display options, and cell styles.

NOTE O ly
& On
The buttons that are not described are not valid with Financial Management; they
l
a e
are valid only with Planning.

n
t e r U
To display the Smart View toolbar:
s
I n
1. In Excel, select View > Toolbars.

c l e
A check mark is displayed next to Smart View.

r a
2. In the toolbar menu, select Hyperion Smart View for Office.

O
12-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

To hide the Smart View toolbar:

1. In Excel, select View > Toolbars.
2. In the toolbar menu, select Hyperion Smart View for Office.

To add buttons to the Smart View toolbar:

1. On the Smart View toolbar, click the menu button , and select Add or Remove
Buttons.
A drop-down menu lists all available toolbar buttons. If a button is
not currently displayed on the toolbar, the icon next to the button
name is not selected.
2. Click the name of an unselected button to add it to the toolbar.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each button that you want to add.

To remove buttons from the Smart View toolbar:

1. On the Smart View toolbar, click the menu button
Buttons.
, and select Add or Remove

m y
2. Click the toolbar button label to remove the button from the toolbar.
d e
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each button that you want to remove.
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-7
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Connecting to Data Sources

Use Connection Manager to establish a connection to a Financial

Management data source.

Inactive connection
Active connection

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Connecting to Data Sources
c l
r a
You use Connection Manager to manage data source connections. A connection is a
communication line between users and the data source, regardless of whether the data
O ly
source is connected to or disconnected from the provider server.

l & On
You can add, delete, and modify connections for each Excel instance. These

for each Excel instance.

n a e
connections have no relationship to worksheets. You can establish multiple connections

NOTE
t e r U s
I n
The Connect/Disconnect button is toggled depending on the status of the selected
data source.

c l e
r a
O
12-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

To connect to a data source:

1. In the Hyperion menu, select Connection Manager.
2. Select a data source and click Connect.
3. In the Connect to Data Source dialog box, enter the user name and password for the
data source.
4. Click Connect.
5. Click Close.

To disconnect from a data source:

1. In the Hyperion menu, select Connection Manager.
2. Select a data source and click Disconnect.
3. Click Close.

To check for active connections:

• In the Hyperion menu, select Active Connections.
m y
The data sources to which you are currently connected are listed.
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-9
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Viewing Data

ƒ Connect to a data source and open a

worksheet.
ƒ Open the default grid. (The default
grid is specific to the data source.)
ƒ Drag dimension members onto the
spreadsheet and pivot dimensions
between rows and columns.
ƒ Type member names in the
spreadsheet to create free-form ad
hoc queries.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Viewing Data
c l
a
With the Ad Hoc Analysis tool, you can perform the following actions:
r
• Create a grid
O ly
• Drill in and out of a dimension
l & On
a e
• Nest dimensions in columns and rows

n
t e r U s
The default grid layout is specific to the Financial Management data source. When
working with data, you can use the default grid, or you can update the columns and rows

n
with other dimension members.
I
c l e
The default ad hoc grid displays accounts in the rows and periods in the columns. The
remaining dimensions default to the first member of the dimension.

r a
O
12-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

By default, cells are formatted with the same color scheme as data grids in the Web
client. For example, cells with modified data are shaded yellow, and invalid cells are
shaded orange. You can customize cell formatting on the Cell Styles tab of the Options
dialog box, which you access in the Hyperion menu.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-11
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Specifying Ad Hoc Options

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Specifying Ad Hoc Options
c l
a
You can select the following options on the Ad Hoc tab of the Options dialog box:
r
O ly
• Suppress Rows—Suppress numeric data values, cells with no data, #MISSING
strings (which indicates that no data exists for a specified member intersection), zero
& On
data values, #NoAccess strings (which are displayed when you do not have security
l
repeated members.
n a e
access to view a data value), invalid characters, underscore characters, and

TIP
t e r U s
I n
A missing value is not the same as a zero value. If no data exists for a data
cell, a value of #MISSING is returned to the worksheet. For data retrieval, if

c l e
any cell in a row contains a value, that row is not suppressed.

r a
• Indentation—View relationships between members in a spreadsheet.
O
12-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

• Navigate Without Data Mode—Perform navigational operations such as Pivot,

Zoom In, Zoom Out, Keep Only, and Remove Only without retrieving data. When you
enable Navigate Without Data, the source database is not calculated during data
retrieval so that you can navigate quickly through a spreadsheet without creating a
query.
• Use Double-click for Ad Hoc Operations—By default, this option is enabled the
first time you launch Smart View. Before you connect to a data source, double-
clicking in a cell in an empty grid activates the Excel edit mode, whether or not this
option is selected. When you are connected to a Financial Management data source,
double-clicking in a blank sheet retrieves the default grid from the server. When the
grid is loaded into Smart View, double-clicking members in the row or columns
enables you to drill down or move up to greater or lesser detail. If this option is not
selected and you are not connected to a data source, double-clicking activates the
Excel edit mode.
• Zoom In—Control the behavior of all zoom-in operations except those within the
selected group.
• Member Retention—Retain or remove dimension members when you use Zoom
options.
m y
spreadsheet.
d e
• Ancestor Position—Determine the order in which hierarchies are displayed in a

c a
To specify ad hoc options:

e A
2. Select the Ad Hoc tab. c l
1. Select Hyperion > Options to display the Options dialog box.

r a
3. Under Suppress Rows, select one or more of the following check boxes:
O ly
• Select No Data/#Missing to suppress rows that contain no data or that contain the
#Missing label.
l & On
a e
• Select Zero to suppress rows that contain only zero values.
n
e r s
• Select No Access to suppress rows that contain #NoAccess strings, which are
t U
displayed when you do not have the correct security access to view a data value.

I n
• Select Invalid to suppress rows that contain invalid values.

c l e
• Select Underscore Characters to suppress underscore characters in member names.

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-13
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

• Select Repeated Members to suppress repeated member names.

TIP
After enabling Suppress #Missing, you cannot automatically retrieve missing
values suppressed during a data refresh by disabling the feature. If you disable
the feature, missing values are retrieved only from that point. To return missing
values to the worksheet, you must disable the Suppress No Data/#Missing Rows
feature, drill up on a member, and then drill down again.

4. Under Indentation, select one of the following options:

• Select None to not indent any member names in the spreadsheet column.
• Select Subitems to indent only descendants and to left-justify ancestors in a
spreadsheet column.
• Select Totals to indent only ancestors and to left-justify descendants in a
spreadsheet column.
5. Under Mode, select the Navigate without Data check box.

m y
6. Under Mouse Operation, select or clear the Use Double-click for Ad Hoc Operations check
box.

d e
7. Under Zoom In, select one of the following options:

c a
• Select Next Level to retrieve data for children of the selected member or members
(default zoom option).
e A
c l
• Select All Levels to retrieve data for all descendants of the selected member or
members.
r a
O ly
• Select Bottom Level to retrieve data for the lowest level of members in a dimension.

& On
• Select Sibling Level to retrieve data for siblings of the selected member or members.

l
a e
8. Under Member Retention, select one or more of the following check boxes:

n
t e r s
• Select Include Selection to retain the selected member along with the other members
retrieved as a result of the zoom. (Default is enabled.)
U
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

• Select Within Selected Group to apply only to the group of members in which the
selection is made. (Default is disabled.)
NOTE
This setting is meaningful only if a sheet contains two or more dimensions of
data down the sheet as rows or across the sheet as columns. (This setting
also affects the behavior of Keep Only and Remove Only operations.)

• Select Remove Unselected Groups to remove all dimension groups that are not in the
selected group.
9. Under Ancestor Position, select one of the following options:
• Select Top to display hierarchies in order from the highest level to the lowest.
• Select Bottom to display hierarchies in order from the lowest level to the highest.
10. Click OK to close the Options dialog box.
11. After you change a worksheet option in the Options dialog box, you must perform a
refresh or drill operation to activate the new settings.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-15
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Specifying Display Options

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Specifying Display Options
c l
a
The options on the Display tab control how data is displayed in the spreadsheet.
r
O ly
You can select the following options:

l & On
• Specify Labels for No Data, Missing, and No Access Data Cells—In addition to
suppressing specific values and characters, you can define labels for missing values

a e
and for data to which you do not have access. If you define replacement labels for
n
t e r U s
these values, the replacement labels are displayed instead of the default labels.
• Specify Data Display Options in Grids—You can specify whether to display the

I n
actual data, the calculation status, or the process review level of the data in data
grids. You can also specify whether to display member names only or member
l e
names with descriptions in grids. Finally, you can specify the scaling options and
c
decimal places and view samples of the selections.

r a
O
12-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

• Enable Manual Calculation Refresh—By default, when you make changes in a

spreadsheet, calculations are made and totals are updated automatically. You can
choose not to have calculations performed automatically by selecting the Manual
Calculation Refresh check box.

To specify display options:

1. Select Hyperion > Options to display the Options dialog box.
2. Select the Display tab.
3. Under Replacement, enter a new label in either or both of the following text boxes:
• Select #NoData/Missing Label to display missing values.
• Select #No Access Label to display data to which you do not have access.
4. Under Cell Status, select one of the following options:
• Select Data to show the actual data.
• Select Calculation Status to show the calculation status.
• Select Process Management to show the process management level.
m y
5. Under Member Name Display Options, select one of the following options:
d e
• Select Member Name Only to display member name labels.
c a
descriptions.
e A
• Select Member Name and Description to display both member name labels and

c l
6. From the Scale drop-down list, select a scale value, or use the default scale defined

r a
for the currency assigned to the entity.

O ly
7. From the Decimal Places drop-down list, select the number of decimal places to be
displayed in the spreadsheet.

l & On
8. Select the Use Thousands Separator check box.

n a e
9. Click OK.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-17
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Creating Free-form Worksheets

You can create ad hoc queries quickly by typing member labels on the
worksheet.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Creating Free-form Worksheets
c l
r a
Free-form worksheets enable you to quickly create ad hoc analyses by typing member
labels on the worksheet. This free-form mode is especially useful when you are familiar
O ly
with the dimensions and members in the application. When you construct an analysis,

l & On
Smart View queries the connected data source, interprets the member names that you
entered, and creates a default view based on the location of the labels.
Guidelines:
n a e
t e r U s
• You cannot place members from the same dimension on both the rows and the
columns.
I n
mark.
c l e
• You must precede all member names that consist of numbers with a single quotation

r a
• You can apply cell styles in free-form mode.

O
12-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

To create a free-form worksheet:

1. On a blank Excel worksheet, select Hyperion > Connection Manger.
2. Select the data source and click Connect.
3. Place the cursor in a cell, and select Hyperion > Member Selection to display the
Dimension Name Resolution dialog box.
4. Select a dimension from the list, and select Vertical Orientation.
Selecting Vertical Orientation places the resulting members
vertically onto the grid (rows).
5. Click OK.
6. Select the members and click Add.
7. Click OK.
8. Select a cell one row above and one cell to the right of the displayed members.
9. Repeat step 3, clear Vertical Orientation, and select a member from the Members list.
Clearing Vertical Orientation places the resulting members
horizontally onto the grid (columns)
m y
10. Click OK.
d e
11. Repeat steps 6 and 7.
ca
The grid displays the members for the rows and columns.

e A
12. Click Refresh.
c l
The grid displays the data.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-19
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Changing the Point of View

Use the POV toolbar to change the point of view.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Changing the Point of View
c l
a
You can use the POV toolbar to change the POV settings for a grid.
r
O ly
If you want to save changes to the POV settings in a worksheet, refresh the worksheet
before saving it.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Changing Members

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Changing Members
c l
dialog box.
r a
You change members, or change the members on the grid, in the Member Selection

O ly
To change members:
l & On
a e
1. On the POV toolbar, click Options > Select Members.

n
t e r U s
2. In the shortcut menu, select a member to open the Member Selection dialog box.
3. From the Dimension drop-down list, select a dimension.

I n
4. From the Filter List drop-down list, select a filter.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-21
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

5. Optional: For advanced filtering, highlight a member without selecting its check box,
and then select a filter from the Filter drop-down list.
NOTE
The highlighted member is used as the filter parameter. For example, if you
highlight Quarter1 and select Children from the Filter List drop-down list, only the
children of Quarter1 are displayed.

6. To find a specific member, click the find button , enter a member name, and then
click Find Next to find a specific member.
7. To add dimension members to the Selection list, Select one or more members, and
click the add button to add the members to the Selection list.
8. To remove dimension members from the Selection list, Select one or more members
and click the remove button to remove individual members, or click to
remove all members.
9. To display dimension descriptions in addition to labels, Select Use Descriptions to
display dimension descriptions.
10. When you have finished selecting members, Click Apply.
m y
11. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for each dimension from which you want to select
d e
members.
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Drilling Down and Up Dimension Hierarchies

ƒ To drill down or up, double-click the
member or use the toolbar icons.
ƒ Options determine the next level for
drilling down. Zoom In / Zoom Out

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Drilling Down and Up Dimension Hierarchies
c l
r a
You can drill into (also known as zoom in and zoom out) various levels of data in the grid
by expanding the members. For example, if you want to view data for a specific quarter

O ly
or month rather than for the whole year, you can drill into the [Year] member to see more
detailed data.

l & On
n a e
When you drill into a member, it is expanded based on the options specified in the
Options dialog box. If you drill into all levels, the grid displays all descendants of the
selected member.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-23
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

To drill into dimension hierarchies:

1. Select a member.
2. Click Drill-down or Drill-up buttons to expand or contract to the next level.
You can also double-click a dimension member to expand to the
next level, to all levels, or directly to the bottom level.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Pivoting Dimensions to Columns or Rows

Drag dimension from the POV

toolbar to rows or columns.

Right-click and drag to pivot row or

column dimension or to move
them to the POV toolbar.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Pivoting Dimensions to Columns or Rows
c l
r a
When you pivot between rows and columns, the selected dimension is moved to the
outermost row or column on the opposite axis. For example, selecting Pivot to Row

O ly
moves the dimension to the far left side of the grid, and selecting Pivot to Column moves

to the POV.
l & On
the dimension to the top of the grid. You can also pivot a dimension from the Ad Hoc grid

n a e
The grid must have at least one dimension on rows and one dimension on columns.

onto the grid.

t e r U s
Before removing a dimension from a grid, you must pivot the replacement dimension

I n
c l e
To change the dimensions on the grid:
1. On the POV toolbar, click Options.

r a
2. Select Pivot to Row or Pivot to Column.

O 3. Select the dimension to move to the row or column.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-25

 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Displaying Cell Text

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Displaying Cell Text
c l
r a
If a worksheet cell contains cell text, you can view it on an Ad Hoc grid. Cells that contain
text are indicated by dark blue borders.

O ly
To display cell text:
l & On
1. Right-click in the cell.

n a e
3. Enter the text.
t e r U s
2. In the Hyperion menu, select Cell Text.

4. Click OK. I n
c l e
r a
O
12-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Viewing Calculation, Translation,

and Consolidation Status in Smart View

ƒ These features work the same way in Smart View as they do in

Financial Management.
ƒ The same security rules apply in Smart View.
ƒ When you are using these features in Smart View, use the Refresh
option to ensure that you are looking at the latest data.

USD

GBP

Calculate data Translate data Consolidate data

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
l
Viewing Calculation, Translation, and Consolidation Status in
c
Smart View
r a
O ly
Users who have the proper access can calculate and translate data. Users can also view
and execute consolidations.

l & On
a e
To see the calculation or process management status:

n
t e r U s
1. In the Hyperion menu, select Options to display the Options dialog box.
2. On the Display tab, select Calculation Status or Process Management.
3. Click OK. I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-27
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Presenting Financial Management Data in Word

and PowerPoint
Display dynamic data from Smart View in documents and slide
presentations.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Presenting Financial Management Data in Word and
c
PowerPoint
r a
O ly
Often, Word or PowerPoint is preferable for presenting data. Smart View enables you to
copy data points from Excel and paste them into Word or PowerPoint, creating linked

l & On
views between the applications. After the data points are copied from Smart View, you
can also change the POV in Microsoft Office products.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Applying Dynamic Data Points

Dynamic data points update the destination application when the source
application data changes.

Pasted data point

in Microsoft Word.

Double-click data
point to retrieve
member information.
Copied data point
from Smart View.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Applying Dynamic Data Points
c l
r a
Data points retain original Excel spreadsheet information, thus enabling users to perform
further analysis on data. For example, from Word or PowerPoint, you can retrieve the

O ly
Excel spreadsheet from which the data points originated.

& On
You can copy data points from Excel to Word or PowerPoint and between Word and
l
a e
PowerPoint. You can also change the members in the POV.

n
NOTE

t e r U s
Dynamic data points are maintained only in Word or PowerPoint. If you copy

n
and paste data within Excel, the data points are not linked to the Excel grid.
I
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-29
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

To copy and paste data:

1. In Excel, select a data cell or range.
2. Select Hyperion > Copy Data Points.
3. Open a Word or PowerPoint document.
4. Select Hyperion > Paste Data Points.
The selected data points are pasted into the document.

To retrieve the corresponding Excel spreadsheet:

1. Select the data cells.
2. Select Hyperion > Visualize in Excel.
3. If asked to log on to the data source, enter the user name and password.
Excel displays the spreadsheet associated with the data cells.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-30 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Changing the POV in Microsoft Office

Toolbar Member Selector

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Changing the POV in Microsoft Office
c l
members in the POV.
r a
After copying and pasting data points into Word or PowerPoint, you can change the

O ly
& On
To change the POV in Word or PowerPoint:
l
a e
1. Select Hyperion > POV Manager.

n
2. Expand the POV list.

t e r U s
The data source connection information and active POV members

I n
are listed.

l e
3. On the toolbar, click Member Selector.

c
r a The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
4. Select a member.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-31
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

5. Click Add.
6. Click OK.

To refresh the document:

• Perform an action:
• Select Hyperion > Refresh.
• Select Hyperion > Refresh All.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-32 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe the purpose of using Smart View

• View and edit Smart View toolbar
• Connect to a data source
• View data by using the Ad Hoc Analysis tool
• Create free-form worksheets in Smart View
• View calculated, translated, and consolidated data status in Smart View
• Present Financial Management data in Word and PowerPoint

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 12-33
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 12 Analyzing Data with Smart View

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-34 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 1 3

Entering Data Using Data Forms in

Smart View 13

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Open data forms
• Navigate data forms
• Select dimension members in Smart View data forms
• Adjust data values
• Work with formulas and cell references in data forms
• Submit data
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Opening Data Forms in Smart View

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Opening Data Forms in Smart View
c l
r a
You use the Forms option on the Hyperion menu to open data forms created in the
Financial Management Web client. You can perform the same range of functions in
O ly
Smart View as in the Web client, such as calculating data, adding cell text, and
submitting data.

l & On
NOTE

n a e
t e r
Add Member and Add Line Item Detail functionality is not supported in data forms
opened in Smart View.
U s
I n
l e
When you open a data form in Smart View, the point of view defined for the form is
displayed. You can select dimension members for the dimensions that are designated as
c
a
Selectable in the data form definition.
r
O
13-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

In data forms, you can add formulas to cells. If you add a formula to a cell, when you
submit the data, the value calculated by the formula is saved to the database. When you
refresh the form, formulas are preserved.
If you open a group of data forms at one time, each one is opened in a separate
worksheet in the current workbook.
You can save the form as an Excel spreadsheet file. However, changes that you make to
the file while disconnected from the Financial Management server are lost when you
connect to the server and the data is refreshed.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-3
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Selecting a Data Form

Select Form button

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Selecting a Data Form
c l
r a
The Select Form dialog box displays a list of data forms for your application. You can
select one or multiple data forms from the list.

O ly
To select a single data form:
l & On
a e
1. Select Hyperion > Forms > Select Form.

n
t
2. Select a data form.e r U s
The Select Form dialog box is displayed.

3. Click OK. I n
c l e
r a
O
13-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Selecting Multiple Data Forms

Use the Shift key or the Ctrl key to select multiple data forms.

Worksheet names

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Selecting Multiple Data Forms
c l
r a
You can select more than one data form in the Select Form dialog box. You can select a
range or you can select multiple data forms that are not in a specific order.

O ly
Multiple data forms are opened in an Excel workbook. Each data form is opened in a
& On
separate worksheet, and each worksheet is assigned a default worksheet name. The
l
of the data form.
n a e
worksheet name is indicated on the bottom tab of the worksheet. You can edit the name

t e r U
To select a range of data forms:
s
I n
1. Select Hyperion > Forms > Select Form.

l e
2. Select the data forms:
c
r a
• Press the Shift key, select contiguous data forms, and release the Shift key.

O • Press the Ctrl key, select noncontiguous data forms, and release the Ctrl key.
3. Click OK.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-5

 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Navigating Data Forms

Smart View uses the same key combinations as Excel for navigation.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Navigating Data Forms
c l
a
You use the methods listed below to navigate within a data form.
r
To navigate data forms: O ly
l & On
• Press the arrow keys to move forward, backward, up, or down in a data form.

n a e
• Press Tab to move to the next cell in the row.

e r s
• Press Shift+Tab to move to the previous cell.
t U
I n
• Press Enter to move to the next cell in the column.

l e
• Press Shift+Enter to move to the previous cell.

c
r a
• Select the tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet to navigate between data forms in a
workbook.

O
13-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Selecting Members in Smart View Data Forms

Use the Member Selection dialog box to select POV dimension members.

Use Descriptions
check box

Select All, Move

Clear All, and Member,
Find buttons Order
buttons

Add,
Remove,
and Remove
All buttons

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Selecting Members in Smart View Data Forms
c l
r a
The Member Selection dialog box is displayed after you open a data form. You can view
labels or descriptions for dimension members. For example, when you select to view
O ly
descriptions, the Software member is displayed as “Software-Financial Software.”

l & On
You can use the Expand and Collapse buttons to expand or collapse all members under

n a e
the highlighted parent, or you can use the expand (+) and collapse (-) signs next to the
dimension members to expand or collapse a subset of members.
NOTE
t e r U s
I n
Add Member and Add Line Item Detail functionality is not available in data forms
opened in Smart View.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-7
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

To select members in data forms:

1. Select Hyperion > Forms > Select Form and click OK.
The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
2. From the Dimension drop-down list, select a dimension.
3. From the Member List, select members:
• Select individual members: Select the check box next to each member that you
want to use.
• Select all members for the highlighted member: Click the Select button.
• Select all immediate children for the highlighted member: Click the drop-down list
and select Children.
• Select all base members for the highlighted member,: Click the drop-down list and
select Base Members.
4. Click Add to move the selected members to the Selection list.
5. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Adjusting Data Values

You can make adjustments to data values in a data form using the Adjust
Data option.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Adjusting Data Values
c l
r a
You can adjust values in data form cells by increasing or decreasing numeric values or
percentages. You can adjust data for multiple cells at one time if all writable cells are at
O ly
the same level. For example, you cannot adjust data for March and Q1 in the same

& On
operation (assuming March and Q1 are both writable).

l
a e
You cannot adjust data values under the following circumstances:

n
t e r
• For a read-only or null member

U s
• If a dimension member has a #Missing or #NoAccess value

I n
l e
To adjust data values:

c
1. Open a data form and click a data cell.

r a
2. Select Hyperion > Adjust.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-9
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

3. Select an option:
• Increase Selected Cells by Percentage (requires a percentage value)
• Decrease Selected Cells by Percentage (requires a percentage value)
• Add Fixed Value to Selected Cells (requires a numeric value)
• Subtract Fixed Value from Selected Cells (requires a numeric value)
• Multiply Selected Cells by a Fixed Value (requires a numeric value)
• Divide Selected Cells by a Fixed Value (requires a numeric value)
4. Enter the percentage or numeric value in the text box.
5. Click Adjust Data.
6. Click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Working with Formulas

and Cell References in Data Forms

Cell with formula

Use the Capture

Formatting option
to preserve data
cell formats.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Working with Formulas and Cell References in Data Forms
c
r a
You can add Excel formulas and formatting to data cells. For example, you can add a
formula that calculates the values for the Budget column based on the values of the
O ly
Actual column plus a percentage. Or you can format data cells to display a currency

l & On
symbol or to display negative numbers in red. When you submit data, the values
calculated by formulas are saved to the database.

n a e
Formulas are automatically preserved, even when you perform these actions:

t e r
• Refresh the Ad Hoc grid
U s
I n
• Zoom in or zoom out (referential formulas are updated with their new relative

c l e
positions)
• Use the Keep Only or Remove Only function

r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-11
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Formulas are not preserved if you change the grid by any of these actions:
• Pivot data (for example, by selecting Pivot to POV or Pivot to Column)
• Clear the grid
Rows and columns that you insert in the grid are preserved. For example, you can insert
a column for rates and enter salary rates. In the Salaries row, you can calculate salary
increases by adding an Excel formula to reference the values in the rates column.
To preserve formatting of data cells, you must apply the Capture Formatting option to the
cells. Formatting applied to cells other than data cells is not preserved. For example,
formatting applied to row and column heading cells is not preserved.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Creating Formulas in Data Forms

Create formulas by entering the formula in the selected data cell.

Formula bar

Formula value

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Creating Formulas in Data Forms
c l
r a
You can create formulas that perform calculations in your data forms. For the example on
the slide, the data form displays a formula that multiplies 250 by 5. The result is displayed
in cell H2.
O ly
NOTE
l & On
n a e
When you submit data form values to Financial Management from Smart View,
only the formula result (value) is saved to the database.

t e r U s
I
To create a formula:n
l e
1. Open a data form in Smart View.
c
a
2. Select the cell where you want to display the formula.
r
O 3. Enter an equal sign (=) in the cell.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-13

 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

4. Enter the value after the equal sign.

5. Enter the mathematical operator.
6. Enter the next value to complete the calculation; for example, =250*5.
7. Press Enter.
The formula results are displayed in the cell that contains the
formula.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Inserting Cell References in Formulas

Primary data form

Cell reference data form

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Inserting Cell References in Formulas
c l
r a
You use cell references in formulas so that Excel can automatically update results when
values change or when you copy formulas. You can use cell references in the primary

O ly
data form (location of the formula), across data forms, or both.

& On
For example, If you want to create a formula that calculates net profit, select the cell
l
n a e
where the net profit results will be displayed and enter an equal sign (=). Then, select the
cell that contains the Total Revenues amount. Enter a minus sign (-), and then select the

t e r U s
cell that contains the Total Expenses amount.

I n
The Net Profit result is dynamic. Each time the amounts change in the Total Revenues
and Total Expenses cells, Net Profit also changes to reflect the new value.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-15
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

To insert cell references in formulas:

1. Open the data forms.
2. Select a cell and enter the formula.
3. Select one or more cell references for the formula.
4. Press Enter.
The formula and the cell references are displayed on the
Formula bar.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Submitting Data

Submit data to Financial

Management

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Submitting Data
c l
r a
You must have the Load Excel Data security role to submit data to Financial
Management. After calculating, translating, or consolidating data, you can submit the
O ly
data to ensure that the data source uses the latest worksheet information.

To submit data: l & On

n a e
t e
2. Change the data form.
r
1. Open a data form in Smart View.

U s
I n
3. Click the Submit button.

l e
4. Refresh the data.
c
r a
5. Optional: Verify that the changes were made to the data in the Web client.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 13-17
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 13 Entering Data Using Data Forms in Smart View

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Open data forms

• Navigate data forms
• Select dimension members in Smart View data forms
• Adjust data values
• Work with formulas and cell references in data forms
• Submit data

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 1 4

Retrieving and Submitting Data Using

Functions in Smart View 14

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Describe Smart View functions
• Create Smart View functions
• Set the point of view
• Import reports and functions into Microsoft Office
• Import reports and functions through smart tags
• Convert workbooks
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Smart View Functions Overview

Use functions to send data from worksheets to data sources and from
data sources to worksheets.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Smart View Functions Overview
c l
worksheet: r a
Functions enable you to bring data from Financial Management applications into a

O ly
• Retrieve data from a Microsoft Excel worksheet and save it to your data source

l & On
• Send data from a data source to a worksheet
• Retrieve currency values
n a e
t e r U s
• Display member descriptions and labels

I n
• Send and retrieve cell text

l
NOTE

c e
The Ad Hoc grid allows only one application per worksheet.

r a
O
14-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Methods for Creating Functions

Manual entry

Function Builder

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Methods for Creating Functions
c l
a
You can create functions manually or you can use predefined functions:
r
O ly
• Manually created functions—You must precede each function with an equal
sign (=). You can specify a connection and a full or partial point of view. If you do not
& On
specify a connection, the system uses the default connection.
l
a e
• Predefined functions—You select the function and dimension members for the
n
t e r U s
point of view from a predefined list in Smart View Function Builder.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-3
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Smart View Functions

These are Smart View functions, along with their counterparts from
the Excel Add-In.
ƒ HsGetValue = HFMVal
ƒ HsSetValue = HFMLnk
ƒ HsCurrency = HFMCur
ƒ HsDescription = HFMDes
ƒ HsLabel = HFMLab
ƒ HsGetText – Displays cell text
ƒ HsSetText – Sends cell text to the Financial Management application

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Smart View Functions
c l
r a
Function Description
O ly
HsGetValue
& On
For a given POV, retrieves data from a data source
l
HsSetValue
a e
For a given POV, sends values to the data source.

n
HsCurrency
HsDescription
t e r U s
Retrieves the entity currency for the selected members
Displays the description for the default POV member
HsLabel
I n
Displays the label for the default POV member

c l
HsGetText
HsSetText
e Retrieves cell text from the data source
Sends cell text to the data source

r a
O
14-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Creating Functions

Function Builder provides

a graphical interface for
creating functions.
Select a function.

Select members.

Click Add to Function.

Review the function.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Creating Functions
c l
r a
Use Function Builder to select the function and dimension members for the POV. View
and validate the function before you paste it into the selected worksheet.
O ly
If a dimension does not apply to the selected function, the dimension is not available for

l & On
selection. If you do not select a member for a dimension, the system uses the default

a e
POV members. You can use either the member or a cell reference.

n
e r s
To create functions using Function Builder:
t U
I n
1. Select a spreadsheet cell.

l e
2. Select Hyperion > Functions > Function Builder.

c The Function Builder dialog box is displayed.

r a
3. From the Select Connection drop-down list, select a data source.
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-5
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

4. From the list of functions, select a function.

5. In the Select Member area, click Select Member to select dimension members.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Add to Function to add the selected POV members to the function.
8. Click Validate Syntax to validate the function syntax before inserting it into the
worksheet.
This option validates only the syntax. It does not validate the
selected members.
9. Optional: Click Clear to remove the function and start over.
10. Click OK to insert the function into the worksheet.
11. Select Hyperion > Refresh.

To select dimension members:

1. Click Select Member.
The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
m y
2. From the Dimension drop-down list, select a dimension.
d e
3. In the Members area, perform these actions:
c a
• Select the check box next to each member that you want to use.

e A
l
• Optional: From the Filter drop-down list, select a filter.
c
• Optional: Click
r a
, enter a member name, and click Find.

O ly
• Optional: Select the Active Members Only check box to display active entities only.

& On
4. Click Add to add the member in the Selection box.
l
a e
5. Optional: Select Use Descriptions to display descriptions.

n
6. Click OK.

t e r U s
I n
To create functions manually:

l e
1. Select a cell.

c
r a
2. Enter the function.
3. Select the parameters for the function.
O
14-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Editing and Refreshing Functions

=HsGetValue("Reports","Scenario#Ac
tual;Year#2005;Period#January;View
#Periodic;Entity#Connecticut.EastSal
es;Value#<Entity
Currency>;Account#[None];ICP#[ICP
None];Custom1#Allcustom1;Custom2
m y
#Fortune100;Custom3#[None];Custo
m4#[None]")

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Editing and Refreshing Functions
c l
r a
You can edit previously defined functions to change the dimension members. You can
also refresh them to update values automatically in the worksheet.

O ly
To edit functions:
l & On
a e
1. Open a worksheet and select the cell whose function you want to edit.

n
t e r U s
2. Select Hyperion > Functions > Function Builder.
3. Select a function from the Select Function section.

I n
4. Click Select Member and from the list of dimension members, select the members that

l e
you want to use.
c
a
5. Click OK.
r
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-7
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

6. Click Clear to remove the current function.

7. Click Add to Function.
8. Click Validate Syntax.
9. Click OK.

To refresh functions:
1. Open the workbook.
2. Verify that you are connected to your data source.
3. Perform an action:
• Select Hyperion > Refresh All to refresh all functions and update all worksheets.
• Select Hyperion > Refresh to refresh all functions and update only the active
worksheet.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Common Function Error Codes

#NO CONNECTION
#INVALID
#LOCKED
#NO ACCESS
#NO DATA
#INVALID INPUT
#READ ONLY
#NO ROLE ACCESS
#NEEDS REFRESH
#INVALID DIMENSION
#INVALID MEMBER
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Common Function Error Codes
c l
Error Code Description
r a
#NO CONNECTION
O ly
You are not connected or logged on to a data source.
#NO ACCESS
& On
You do not have access to the cell.
l
#INVALID
a e
Invalid metadata; these cells are displayed in red in data grids.

n
#LOCKED
#NO DATA
t e r U s
Cell is locked.
Cell contains no data.
#INVALID INPUT
I n HsSetValue data value is not valid.

c l
#READ ONLY
e
#NO ROLE ACCESS
Cell is read-only; applies to HsSetValue.
The user does not have security rights to load data from Smart View

r a to the database.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-9
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Error Code Description

#NEEDS REFRESH Refresh Functions must be run.
#INVALID DIMENSION Invalid dimension is specified in the function.
#INVALID MEMBER Invalid dimension member name is specified in the function.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

m y
d e
c a
e A
Setting the Point of View
c l
r a
In POV Manager, you can select dimension members to use as a default POV for an Ad
Hoc grid, or for the background POV for dimensions when using functions. From the
O ly
POV Manager, you can select only one member per dimension.

l & On
Use POV Manager to set a POV for a workbook or worksheet. In functions that do not

n a e
include all 12 dimensions, the dimension members specified in POV Manager are used
as the background POV members.

t e r U s
For example, in POV Manager, you can set a dimension member for custom dimensions

I n
1 through 4. Once set, these dimensions do not need to be reflected in an HsGetValue
function. Instead, the system relies on the background POV that is supplied by POV
Manager.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-11
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

To edit the POV:

1. Select Hyperion > POV Manager.
2. Expand the Active folder.
3. Select the active connection whose point of view you want to change.
4. On the POV Manager toolbar, click Member Selector.
The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the members and click OK.
6. Click Close.
7. Select Hyperion > Refresh to refresh the worksheet.

To save the POV to a worksheet:

1. Select Hyperion > POV Manager.
2. Expand the Active folder.
3. Drag an active connection to the worksheet.
m y
4. Click Close.
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Importing Reports and Functions into

Microsoft Office

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Importing Reports and Functions into Microsoft Office
c
r a
You can import reports from Financial Reporting and Web Analysis into Microsoft Excel,
Word, or PowerPoint. For example, you may want to include reports in sales or
O ly
marketing presentations, sales documents, or annual reports.

l & On
Smart View also supports smart tags in Excel, Word, and PowerPoint 2003 so that you

a e
can import reports and the HsGetValue function from Financial Management.

n
e r
To import reports into Excel:
t U s
I n
1. Connect to a data source that contains a Financial Reporting or Web Analysis report.

l e
2. Select Hyperion > BI+ Document.

c The Import Workspace Document from a Hyperion Repository

r a dialog box is displayed.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-13
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

3. In the Select a Document list, expand the repository and select a report.
4. Click OK.
5. From the Import Document As drop-down list, select an option:
• Select Fully Formatted Report to display a report in HTML. You can only view the
report; you cannot change it.
• Select Query-Ready Report to run ad hoc analysis on reports when you are connected
to a Financial Management data source. For example, you can retrieve, zoom in,
and pivot data.
6. Click Finish.

To import reports into Word or PowerPoint:

1. Use Connection Manager to connect to a data source that contains a Financial
Reporting or Web Analysis report.
2. Select Hyperion > BI+ Document.
The Import Workspace Document from a Hyperion Repository
dialog box is displayed.
m y
3. In the Select a Document list, expand the repository and select a report.
d e
c a
4. From the Import Document As drop-down list, select Image to import the report as an
image object.

e A
5. Click OK.

c l
r a
The image object is imported, and you can use the Format Picture
option to format the object; for example, you can crop and resize it.

O ly
The settings are preserved after you refresh the object.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Importing Reports and Functions

Through Smart Tags

Smartview is the keyword that an end

user types into Word, Excel, or
PowerPoint to expose the Hyperion
Smart View menu.

Smart view menu

Select a Reports repository

m y
e
Reports available for import

d
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
l
Importing Reports and Functions Through Smart Tags
c
r a
Smart tags are predefined properties that associate available actions with a keyword in
Microsoft Office 2003 or later. For example, if you type the keyword SMARTVIEW in an
O ly
Excel cell, the smart tag icon is displayed next to the cell. You then have access to the

& On
Smart View menu, from which you can take these actions:

l
a e
• Use the Smart View HsGetValue function to display data

n
t e r
• Import grids into Excel
U s
• Import images into Word and PowerPoint

I n
• Refresh the previously inserted images and data

c l e
If you want to use “smartview” as a word in your document, rather than as a smart tag, you

r a
can disable the smart tag feature for that instance of the word. You can turn off the smart
tags if you do not want Excel, Word, or PowerPoint to recognize them.

O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-15
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

To enable smart tags:

1. On the Tools menu, select AutoCorrect Options.
2. On the Smart Tags tab, select the Label text with smart tags check box.
3. Click OK.

To disable smart tags:

1. On the Tools menu, select AutoCorrect Options.
2. On the Smart Tags tab, clear the Label text with smart tags check box.
3. Click OK.

To import a report using smart tags:

1. Select Hyperion > Connection Manager to connect to a data source that contains a
Financial Reporting or Web Analysis report.
2. Type the keyword SMARTVIEW in the document, and move the cursor over the word.
The Smart Tags Action button is displayed.
m y
3. Click to display the Hyperion Smart View menu.
d e
4. Select BI+ Document.
c a
A
5. In the Select a Document list, expand the repository and select a report.

e
l
6. From the Import Document As drop-down list, select Image.
c
7. Click OK.
r a
To import the HsGetValue function: O ly
l & On
1. Select Hyperion > Connection Manager to connect to a Financial Management data
source.

n a e
t r U s
2. Type the keyword SMARTVIEW in the document, and move the cursor over the word.
e
The Smart Tags Action button is displayed.
3. Click I n
to display the Hyperion Smart View menu.

c l e
4. Select Functions.

r a
O
14-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

5. Select HsGetValue, and select the data source connection.

The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
6. From the Dimension drop-down list, select a dimension.
7. Optional: Perform an action:
• From the Filter drop-down list, select a filter.
• For advanced filtering, highlight a member without selecting its check box, and
then select a filter from the Filter drop-down list.
NOTE
This procedure uses the highlighted member as the filter parameter. For
example, if you highlight Quarter1 and select Children from the Filter list, only
the children of Quarter1 are displayed.

• To find a specific member, click , enter a member name, and click Find Next.
8. Select the check box next to each member that you want to use.
9. Click Add.
m y
10. Click OK.
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-17
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Converting Workbooks

Existing formula

='C:\Program Files\Hyperion Solutions\Hyperion Financial

Management\Client\HFMAddin.xla'!HFMVal(" PD#January.C2#Fortune100.")

Converted formula

='C:\Program Files\HyperionSmartView\Bin\
HsTbar.xla'!HsGetValue("Period#January;Custom2#Fortune100;")

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Converting Workbooks
c l
r a
You use the migration utility to convert Financial Management spreadsheet add-in
functions to the Smart View syntax. You can convert one workbook, or you can use the
O ly
batch option to convert multiple workbooks.
Conversion Guidelines
l & On
a e
The conversion utility may not be able to convert all existing functions; some functions
n
points:
t e r U s
may require manual adjustment. When you are converting workbooks, consider these

I n
• If every parameter is a cell reference, the function is converted. For example,

c l e
=HFMVal($B$1&$C$1&$B$2&$C$3&$B$5&$C$5&$B$6&$C$6).

r a
O
14-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

• If the function specifies dimension parameters, the members are cell references, and
the period separator is hard-coded, the function is converted.For example,
=HFMVal("S#"&D2&".Y#"&D3&".VW#"&D5&".'). In this case, you must manually
change the periods to commas.
• If the function specifies dimension parameters and the members and period
separator are cell references, the function is not converted. For example,
=HFMVal("S#"&E2&"Y#"&E3&"VW#"&E5), where E2=Actual, E3=2004,
E5="<Scenario View>."
• If the function specifies dimension parameters, the members are cell references, and
the period separator is in a separate cell, the function is not converted. For example,
=HFMVal("S#"&F2&C1&"Y#"&F3&C1&"VW#&F5&C1), where C1=. (period separator).
• If the function specifies an application as a cell reference, the function is not
converted.

To convert one workbook:

1. Select Hyperion > Functions > Migrate Active Workbook.
2. If your functions contain application references, map the application to the
m y
corresponding connection.
3. Click Convert. d e
4. At the conversion completed message, click OK.
c a
The migration result is displayed.
e A
c l
5. If functions failed to convert, adjust them manually.
6. Click Save Result.
r a
O ly
7. Select a location to store the results file, and click Save.
8. Click Close.
l & On
n a e
t e r
To convert multiple workbooks:

U s
1. Select Hyperion > Functions > Migrate Active Workbook.

I n
2. If your functions contain application references, map the application to the

l e
corresponding connection.

c
a
3. Click Add, select the workbooks that you want to convert, and click Next.

r
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-19
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

4. Click Next.
The migration result is displayed.
5. If functions failed to convert, adjust them manually.
6. Click Save Result.
7. Select a location to store the results file, and click Save.
8. Click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Describe Smart View functions

• Create Smart View functions
• Set the point of view
• Import reports and functions into Microsoft Office
• Import reports and functions through smart tags
• Convert workbooks

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 14-21
 Module 6 Reporting and Analyzing Data
Lesson 14 Retrieving and Submitting Data Using Functions in Smart View

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 M O D U L E 7

Introduction to Financial Reporting 14

Overview
This module introduces Financial Reporting.
Lessons in this unit include:
• Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace
• Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 1 5

Navigating Financial Reports in

Workspace 15

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Identify Financial Reporting functionality
• Access financial reports in Workspace
• Set preferences
• Open and preview reports
• Perform searches
• Print reports
m y
• Set the point of view
d e
c
• Integrate reports with Microsoft Office applications a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Financial Reporting in Workspace

Set preferences Create books

m y
d e
View reports
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Financial Reporting in Workspace
c l
Financial Reporting: r a
Depending on your Workspace security access, you can perform these tasks for

O ly
• View and print reports and books
• Create and modify books
l & On
n a e
• Create and schedule batches

t e r U s
• Assign permissions to repository items

I
• Set preferencesn
l e
• Perform administrative tasks, such as managing users
c
r a
O
15-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Financial Reporting Overview

Financial Reporting functionality

Batc hes and Asymmetric PDF & HTML

books reporting reports

Guided Reusable Conditional Access

analysis objects formatting security

Grids Charts Printing Scheduling

m y
Report designers and viewers
e
Reports and books

d
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Financial Reporting Overview
c l
r a
With Financial Reporting, you can graphically design and present analytic data. You can
design traditional financial report formats, such as cash management reports, profit and

O ly
loss statements, and balance sheets. You can also design nontraditional formats for

& On
financial or analytic data that include text and graphics.

l
a e
Key features of Financial Reporting:

n
t e r U s
• Flexible range of output options
• Scalable, cross-platform, server-based report generation

I n
• Graphical report creation with access to multiple Hyperion data sources

l e
• Objects that are reusable across multiple reports
c
a
• Book creation for similar reports
r
O • Dynamic scheduling that enables automated reporting

Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-3

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Financial Reporting Security

Security is based on users, groups, and roles

J. Doe Provisioning
Manager

Scheduler

A. Smith
Report
Development
Designer
F. Jones

V. Yu
Marketing Explorer

P. Frank

m y
Users Groups Roles

d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Financial Reporting Security
c l
r a
When creating users, you specify how they are authenticated when they log on to
Financial Reporting and what actions they can perform. For example, you define which

O ly
users can design reports and which users can only view reports. After creating objects in

l & On
the repository, you set permissions that define which users can view or modify the
objects. For example, you can specify that jsmith can view all reports in the Sales
Reports folder.
n a e
t e r U s
Users, groups, and roles are part of the security system. You assign roles to users to
determine the type of user and actions.

I n
A role is specific to a product’s application and is defined based on product functions. For

l e
example, a user with the Report Designer role can access Hyperion System 9 BI+

c
Financial Reporting Studio™ and create reports. A user with the Scheduler role can

a
schedule and manage batches in Workspace.
r
O
15-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

A group is a collection of related users with similarities such as geographical location,

department within an organization, or the need to share information.
A user can belong to multiple groups. You can assign roles through groups. The users in
the group inherit the roles that you assign to the group.
Available roles for Financial Reporting:

Role Description
Directory manager Create and manage users and groups
Explorer Access the Explore module to list and search for repository content
Global administrator Access all resources and all functionality
Provisioning manager Provision users and groups to applications
Report designer Access Financial Reporting Studio, create report objects, and
import and export Financial Reporting content
Scheduler Schedule batches and manage batch output

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-5
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Accessing Financial Reports in Workspace

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
Accessing Financial Reports in Workspace
e A
c l
After logging on to Workspace, you can access financial reports in the Navigate menu.

r a
To access financial reports:
O ly
1. Click Navigate > Explore.
l & On
a e
2. Browse to the location of the financial reports.

n
3. Double-click a report.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
15-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Opening and Previewing Reports

.
Sort the list by clicking a column header

Qtr Reports folder Items in the Qtr Reports folder

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
Opening and Previewing Reports
e A
c l
In the Explore module, you can browse the repository and perform these actions:
• Open reports and books r a
• Edit books and batches O ly
• Export and import items
l & On
• Set security access
n a e
t e r U s
When you select a repository folder in the view pane, the folder items to which you have

I n
access are displayed in the content pane. By default, each item displays the name, type,
date modified, and description. You can sort the list of items by clicking the column

l e
headings. You can also change the column order by sliding the column headings to the

c
right or left.

r a
In the View menu, you can change the display by showing or hiding columns and setting

Othe width of each column. You can also limit the display to a particular type of item, such
as displaying only a list of books.

Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-7

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Searching for Items

Search criteria Search results

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Searching for Items
c l
r a
In the Explore module, you can search for items based on keywords. By default,
keywords are automatically generated for repository items, and include the words in the
item name and description.
O ly
l & On
You can narrow your search by specifying the item location, date, and type.
Search rules:
n a e
e r s
• The search is not case-sensitive.
t U
n
• Wildcards are not supported in the Keywords text box.
I
c l e
• Multiple keywords are separated by a space. A keyword containing a space must be
enclosed in double quotation marks.

r a
• The search starts in the folder specified in the “Look in” text box and proceeds

O through all subfolders.

15-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

To search for items in the Explore module:

• In the Explore module, select Tools > Search.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-9
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Previewing Reports

Grid POV
Page selector
User POV

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Previewing Reports
c l
a
In the Explore module or on the desktop, you can preview reports in two formats:
r
O ly
• Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)—Preview reports or snapshots

l & On
• Portable Document Format (PDF)—Preview or print reports or snapshots displayed
in the Web browser in Adobe Acrobat Reader

n a e
NOTE

t e r s
Before previewing reports in PDF, ensure that a PDF writer (Adobe
U
I n
Acrobat Distiller, GNU Ghostscript, or AFPL Ghostscript) is installed with
your print server.

c l e
r a
O
15-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

When you view a dynamic report, the user POV is displayed. When you change the user
POV, the report is automatically refreshed to display current data for the new member
selection.
When you view a snapshot report, you see data for a specific point in time. Because the
POV is fixed with static data when it is created, the user POV is not displayed when you
view it. A snapshot report is disconnected from the data source and is not updated when
data changes.
In the Financial Reporting general preferences, you can select the default preview mode
for reports. When you double-click a report name in the repository, the report is displayed
in your default preview mode. The selected setting remains in effect until you change it.

To preview reports or snapshots:

1. In the repository, right-click a report or snapshot.
2. Perform one of these actions:
• Open In > HTML Preview.
• Open In > PDF Preview.

m y
The report is displayed in the content pane.

d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-11
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Printing Reports and Snapshots

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Printing Reports and Snapshots
c l
a
You can print reports or snapshots in HTML or PDF mode:
r
O ly
• HTML—If the report or snapshot has multiple page members, only the displayed
page member is printed. Browser print capabilities determine how the report is
printed.
l & On
a e
• PDF—If the report or snapshot has multiple page members, all page members are
n
t e r U s
printed. PDF printing ensures that the report or snapshot is properly formatted and
paginated; it is also better quality than HTML.

I n
c l e
r a
O
15-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

To print a report or a snapshot:

1. Select File > Print, and select a print option:
• HTML
• PDF
2. Select a printer.
3. Click Print.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-13
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Changing the User Point of View

Wildcard search for entity names

that begin with LOC

Search results

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Changing the User Point of View
c l
r a
When you preview a dynamic report, the user POV bar is displayed in the view pane or
above the report. You change the user POV member selections to dynamically change
O ly
the data displayed and calculated in the report. When you change the POV, the report

& On
displays the data for the new POV member selection.

l
n a e
You can search for a member in the Member Selection dialog box. For the example
shown on the slide, you search for all entities that contain LOC. You can then select the

e r
member from the search results.
t U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
15-14 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Member Selection dialog box options:

Option Description
Show Properties Select the properties to display, such as Name, Description,
and ShortName.

Expand All Rows Expand the dimension hierarchy.

Collapse All Rows Collapse the dimension hierarchy.

Rows Per Page Specify the number of rows displayed on a page. If more
members are available than the number of rows specified,
Next Page and Previous Page buttons enable you to scroll
through the rows.
Find list Select the option on which to base the search, such as Name,
Description, Generation, or Level.
Find box Type the characters for a search:
• Partial text with wildcard symbols
• Exact characters (Enclose the characters, and the blank
m y
Find
spaces between them, in quotation marks.)
Find the items that match the search criteria.
d e
c a
Use Wildcards Search by text and wildcard symbols:

e A
c l
? represents one character
* represents multiple characters

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-15
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Previewing the Point of View

Select On to preview
the user POV.
Select the POV before
the data is retrieved.

Open the report in

HTML or PDF mode.

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Previewing the Point of View
c l
r a
When you view a report in Workspace, the report displays the current data. If the POV is
not the one you want, you must change it and rerun the report. A second query of the

O ly
database is created; if you are working with a large database, this process is time-

l & On
consuming. Workspace enables you to preview and select the user POV before it
queries the database. When you preview the user POV, you make your POV selections
before the report runs.
n a e
e
To preview the POV option:
t r U s
I n
1. In Workspace, click Navigate > Explore.

c l e
2. Click File > Preferences.
3. Select Financial Reporting.

r a
4. In the User Point of View section, select On.
O 5. Click OK.

15-16 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

To preview the POV:

1. In Workspace, click Navigate > Explore.
2. Select a financial report.
The POV is displayed.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-17
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Limiting User Point of View Selections

Member Selection
button

Member label
options
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Limiting User Point of View Selections
c l
r a
By default, all dimension members are available when you access the user POV. For
Financial Management applications, dimensions may contain members that you never

O ly
access.You can limit the dimension members by creating a Choices List, so that only list

connection.
l & On
members are displayed for all reports that retrieve data from the same database

n a e
For the example shown on the slide, you specify that available members for the Scenario

member.
t e r U s
dimension are Actual, Budget, and Plan. For all other dimensions, you may select any

I n
When setting up the members for the user POV, you can define the display of member

l e
names in the user POV bar. You can select to view the dimension name, member name,

c
description, or both member name and description.

r a
O
15-18 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

To set up user POV member selections:

1. Select File > Preferences, click Financial Reporting, and click Setup Members.
The Setup User POV dialog box is displayed.
2. From the Database Connection list, select a database connection.
The dialog box displays the database dimensions.
3. To the right of the dimension for which you want to create a choices list, click Go to
Member Selection: <dimension name>.

A Members tab is displayed in the Setup User POV dialog box.

4. In the Available area on the left, select the members for the choices list, and click the
add button .

The members are displayed in the Selected area.

5. Click OK to save the member selections.
The Setup User POV dialog box displays the members.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for other dimensions.
m y
e
7. In the “Display Member Label as” list, select the member name or description or both.
d
8. In the “Dimension Labels are” list, perform a task:
c a
A
• If you want to display dimension labels in the user POV bar, select Included.

e
Included.
c l
• If you do not want to display dimension labels in the user POV bar, select Not

9. Click OK to save your changes.

r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-19
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Changing Page Members

Qtr3 page selection Qtr4 page selection

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Changing Page Members
c l
r a
You can change a page member only if you assigned multiple members to the page axis
during the report design. You must view the report in HTML to select different page

O ly
members. After you change the page member, the report is refreshed and the data for

& On
the selected members is displayed.

l
n a e
When you view a report with multiple page members in PDF, the data for the page
members is displayed on different pages.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
15-20 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Integrating Reports into

Microsoft Office Applications

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Integrating Reports into Microsoft Office Applications
c
a
You can move reports and snapshots into Microsoft Office applications:
r
O ly
• Export from Workspace—You can export report content as an image into supported
Microsoft Office applications. After inserting the content, you can requery the

l & On
corresponding Web application to refresh the image in Smart View.

a e
• Import to Microsoft Office—When you are logged on to a supported Microsoft
n
t e r U s
Office application, you can import reports and snapshots from the Workspace
repository into Word, PowerPoint, and Excel. This feature is provided through Smart

I n
View, which provides integration with Microsoft Office for Financial Reporting, Web
Analysis, Financial Management, and Planning.

c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-21
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Exporting Reports to Excel

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Exporting Reports to Excel
c l
spreadsheet.
r a
After previewing a report in HTML or PDF mode, you can export it to an Excel

Options: O ly
l & On
• Fully Formatted Grids and Text—The current page is exported to Excel in a format

a e
that is similar to its format in Financial Reporting. The report is converted to HTML
n
t e r s
with the Hyperion formatting definitions and calculated numbers. Charts are exported
as images. If you want to export multiple pages, you display and export one page at a
U
time.
I n
c l e
NOTE
In Microsoft Office 2000, only grid and text objects are exported to Excel.

r a Charts and images are not exported.

O
15-22 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

• Query-Ready Grids and Text—The first grid is exported to Excel. The grid is
converted to HTML, and Hyperion-specific formatting is removed. Images and charts
are not exported. After the grid is exported, you connect to a Financial Management
server, and can perform ad hoc analysis using Smart View.

To export a report to Microsoft Excel:

1. In the Explore module, open a report.
The report is displayed in HTML or PDF mode.
2. Select File > Export > Excel.
3. Perform an action:
• Select Fully Formatted Grids and Text.
• Select Query-Ready Grids and Text.
The File Download dialog box is displayed.
4. Perform an action:
• Click Open to open the report in an Excel spreadsheet and save the spreadsheet.
m y
e
• Click Save to save the report as an Excel worksheet that you can open later.
d
NOTE

c a
If you set Excel files to open as a browser preference, the file may open
A
automatically in the browser window, without displaying the File Download
e
dialog box.

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-23
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Exporting Reports to Word and PowerPoint

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Exporting Reports to Word and PowerPoint
c l
r a
After previewing a report in the Explore module, you can export it as an image to Word or
PowerPoint. You can export reports if you are using Microsoft Office 2002 or later.

O ly
& On
To export a report to Word or PowerPoint:
l
a e
1. In the Explore module, open a report.

n
t e
2. Select File > Export.
r U s
The report is displayed in HTML or PDF mode.

I n
3. Perform an action:

c l e
• Select Word.

r a
• Select PowerPoint.

O The File Download dialog box is displayed.

15-24 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

4. Perform an action:
• Click Open to open the report in Word or PowerPoint.
• Click Save to save the report as a Word or PowerPoint document that you can open
later.
TIP
After importing the image, you can use the Microsoft Office Format Picture
option to further format the object; for example, to crop and resize the image.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-25
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Importing Reports to
Microsoft Office Applications

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
l
Importing Reports to Microsoft Office Applications
c
Smart View:
r a
You can import Financial Reporting reports to Microsoft Office applications through

O ly
• Word and PowerPoint—The report is imported as an image.

l & On
• Excel—The report is imported based on the selected method (Fully Formatted Grids

a e
and Text or Query-Ready Grids and Text).
n
t e r U s
In Microsoft Office, you must connect to a Workspace repository that contains the reports
that you want to import. You log on to the data source only once. For example, you can

I n
log on to a data source connection in Word, and use that same connection to access
data in Excel or PowerPoint.

c l e
r a
O
15-26 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

To import a report to Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, or Excel:

1. Launch Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, or Excel.
2. Select Hyperion > Connection Manager.
The Connection Manager dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the data source and click Connect.
The Connection credentials dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the user name and password, click Connect, and then click Close.
5. Select Hyperion > BI+ Document > Import.
The Import Document from a Hyperion Repository dialog box is
displayed.
6. Expand a repository folder and select a report.
7. Click OK.
8. Select the members from the displayed POV.
9. Click Next.
m y
10. In the Import Document As list, perform an action:
d e
a
• Word or PowerPoint: Select Image and click OK to import the report as an image.
c
• Excel: Select Fully Formatted Report or Query-Ready Report.

e A
11. Click Finish.

c l
a
12. Optional: Save the report as a Microsoft Office document that you can open later.
r
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 15-27
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 15 Navigating Financial Reports in Workspace

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Identify Financial Reporting functionality

• Access financial reports in Workspace
• Set preferences
• Open and preview reports
• Perform searches
• Print reports
• Set the point of view
• Integrate reports with Microsoft Office applications

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
15-28 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 L E S S O N 1 6

Navigating Reports in Financial

Reporting Studio 16

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
• Access Financial Reporting Studio
• Open reports
• Preview and print reports

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Accessing Financial Reporting Studio

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Accessing Financial Reporting Studio
c l
r a
Financial Reporting Studio is a report designer in which you create the structure, layout,
and format of a report and specify the data sources from which the report retrieves its
O ly
data. No data is shown in the report design window. During report design, you can add

print the report.

l & On
objects to the report, dynamically change the data that is displayed, and preview and

n a e
t e r U s
Logging On to Financial Reporting Studio
You must have a valid administrator or designer user ID and password to log on to

I n
Financial Reporting. The user ID is authenticated by Shared Services or by an external

c l e
source, such as Analytic Services or Windows NT LAN Manager.

r a
O
16-2 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

To log on to Financial Reporting Studio:

1. Select Start > Programs > Hyperion System 9 BI+ > Financial Reporting Studio.
2. Enter the user ID, password, and server.
3. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 16-3
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Financial Reporting Studio Workspace

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Financial Reporting Studio Workspace
c l
r a
When you log on to Financial Reporting Studio, a workspace area with a list of report
objects is displayed. From this workspace, you can create or open a report.

O ly
Standard Toolbar
l & On
The standard toolbar provides mouse alternatives to menu commands.

n a e
Button

t e r s
Description

U
New Report

I n Opens a report workspace

Open

c l e Opens the Open dialog box, to select a report

r a Save Saves a report or object in the repository

O
16-4 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Button Description

Repository Opens the repository

Print Opens the Print dialog box

Print Preview Displays the active report in the Print Preview window

Web Preview Displays the active report in the Web browser

Repository Toolbar
The repository toolbar provides mouse alternatives to menu commands that manage the
repository.

Button Description

Delete Deletes the selected object

Refresh Refreshes the repository display of objects

Managing objects in the repository is covered in more detail in a later lesson.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 16-5
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Displaying Repository Objects

Object name Object type

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
Displaying Repository Objects
c l
r a
The Financial Reporting repository is the object management tool that functions like
Windows Explorer. You save all report objects in the repository and can then use an
object in more than one report.
O ly
Example object types:
l & On
Object Type Description
n a e
Grid
e r s
Report object that contains data from external data sources

t U
Image
Report I n
Report object that contains a graphic file or an image file
Layout that dynamically identifies the content and formatting of a report (A

Snapshot
c l e report is populated with data when you run it.)

r a Generated report that contains static data from a point in time (Subsequent
changes of the data in the data source do not affect report content.)

O Text Report object that contains text or functions

16-6 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

You cannot delete the highest-level folder named Root. In Workspace, you can add
additional folders and categorize them to suit your needs. For instance, you can create
folders for batches, books, images, and reports or for different departments.

To display repositor y objects:

1. Select File > Explore.
A list of repository objects is displayed.
2. Optional: Select View > Display Items of Type, and select one of the following options to
display selected object types:
• All Items
• Report
• Snapshot
• Saved Report Object

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 16-7
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Opening Reports

Financial Reporting Studio

Database Explore (report repository) Opened report

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Opening Reports
c l
r a
You open reports to design, preview, or print them. You can display both dynamic reports
and snapshot reports. A dynamic report is opened in the report workspace. A snapshot
O ly
report is opened in the print preview or Web preview window.

l & On
When working with dynamic reports, you must be connected to an Analytic Services or

a e
Planning database. Otherwise, you can view only snapshot reports.

n
e r s
To open reports in Financial Reporting Studio:
t U
I n
1. Select File > Explore.

c l e
The reports repository is displayed.
2. Expand the repository folders to locate reports.

r a
3. Double-click the report.
O The report is opened.

16-8 Financial Management for Interactive Users

 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Report Components

Image Text box

Grid

Chart
m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Report Components
c l
a
Reports contain report objects such as text boxes, grids, images, and charts.
r
O ly
When you design a report, you add report objects to the report workspace. As you select
each report object, its property sheet is displayed on the right side of the workspace. You
& On
use property sheets to customize report objects.
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 16-9
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

User Point of View Members

Dimension name Member name

User POV bar

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

ca
e A
User Point of View Members
c l
r a
The user POV bar displays members that are not defined in the grid. The bar is specific
to a database for a single user, but it is not specific to a report or grid within a report. In

O ly
the user POV, you simultaneously change the default values for all grids in the report. By

calculated in the report.

l & On
changing the user POV, you dynamically change the data that is displayed and

n a e
When you select a dimension on the user POV bar, the Select Members dialog box is

t e r U s
displayed. You can change the selected member for each standard and attribute
dimension that is not defined in the grid. In the POV, you can select only one member for
each dimension.
I n
c l e
r a
O
16-10 Financial Management for Interactive Users
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Report Preview and Printing

Print Preview Web Preview

m y
d e
Copyright © 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
Report Preview and Printing
c l
r a
While designing a report, you preview to check the result of the structure, layout, and
format of the report. You can preview a report in two ways:
O ly
• Print Preview—Displays the report with data, as it is displayed when printed. The

l & On
Print Preview window includes a toolbar for printing, navigating, zooming in, and
zooming out.

n a e
t e r U
it is displayed in Workspace.s
• Web Preview—Opens a Web browser window and displays the report with data, as

I n
You can print dynamic and snapshot reports. For example, you might print end-of-month

l e
reports for all regions. You can open a report and print it, or you can print a report from
the Explore window without opening it. When you print a report, you can select the
c
a
printer, print range, and number of copies.
r
O
Financial Management for Interactive Users 16-11
 Module 7 Introduction to Financial Reporting
Lesson 16 Navigating Reports in Financial Reporting Studio

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

• Access Financial Reporting Studio

• Open reports
• Preview and print reports

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
16-12 Financial Management for Interactive Users